Kia 2017 Rio Owner Manual

Kia 2017 Rio Owner Manual
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value
for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a
customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to
your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia Dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement
parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
i
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2017 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Canada Inc..
Printed in Korea
table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Driving your vehicle
5
What to do in an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Index
I
ii
Introduction
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle break-in process / 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-6
1
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. Use the
index when looking for a specific area or
subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all
information in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to enhance
your personal safety. Carefully read and
follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these instructions.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.
1 2
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not
use methanol blended fuels)
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (We
recommand that you consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
Tighten the cap until it clicks one time,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator
will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle. Do not use
gasohol containing more than 15%
ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol.
Ethanol provides less energy than gasoline and it attracts water, and it is thus
likely to reduce your fuel efficiency and
could lower your MPG results. Methanol
may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control
system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur. Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be
covered by the manufacturer's warranty if
they result from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
3. Gasohol containing more than 15%
ethanol.
1 3
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised
of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent
gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively
for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is
not compatible with your vehicle. Use of
“E85” may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recommends
that customers do not use fuel with an
ethanol content exceeding 15 percent.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel system
or any performance problems caused by
the use of “E85” fuel.
1 4
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene (Fe),
and Other metalic additives, may cause
vehicle and engine damage or cause
misfiring, poor acceleration, engine
stalling, catalyst melting, clogging,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,
etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these
fuels may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT
(Methylcyclopentadi-enyl
Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Kia does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emission control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)
over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%
weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may
not cover damage to the fuel system and
any performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels containing
methanol or fuels containing MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of
the fuel system, engine control system
and emission control system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines
will help the engine run cleaner and
enhance performance of the Emission
Control System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please
go to the website (www.toptiergas.com).
For customers who do not use TOP Tier
Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have
problems starting or the engine does not
run smoothly, additives that you can buy
separately may be added to the gasoline. If
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel
tank at every 12,000 km or every engine oil
change is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorized Kia dealer
along with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles) of operation.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR).The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
* How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/
fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was traveling.
1 6
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview I / 2-2
Exterior overview II / 2-3
Interior overview / 2-4
Instrument panel overview / 2-5
Engine compartment / 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW I
■ Front
- 4 Door
- 5 Door
1. Hood ......................................................4-28
5. Outside rearview mirror..........................4-40
2. Headlamp ..............................................7-74
6. Sunroof ..................................................4-33
3. Fog light ................................................7-74
7. Wiper blade ............................................7-42
4. Tires and wheels ....................................7-48
8. Windows ................................................4-24
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OUB024003N/OUB025003K
2 2
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW II
■ Rear
- 4 Door
- 5 Door
9. Door ......................................................4-16
13. Rear wiper blade ................................7-44
10. Fuel filler lid ........................................4-30
14. Center high mounted stop light ..........7-83
11. Rear combination lamp ......................7-79
15. Rear window defroster........................4-83
12. Tailgate (trunk) ....................................4-20, 22
16. Antenna ..............................................4-121
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OUB025004N/OUB025008N
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-16
2. Central door lock switch....................4-17
3. Power window switches ....................4-24
4. Power window lock button ................4-27
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch ................................................4-41
6. Hood release lever............................4-28
7. Fuel filler lid release lever .................4-30
8. Trunk lid release lever (4 door) .........4-20
9. Steering wheel ..................................4-37
10. Steering wheel tilt control lever.......4-38
11. Active ECO button ..........................5-43
12. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ..............................................4-44
13. ESC OFF button .............................5-27
14. Heated steering wheel switch
(if equipped)....................................4-38
15. Idle Stop and Go system OFF button
(if equipped)....................................5-40
16. Fuse box .........................................7-62
17. Brake pedal.....................................5-22
18. Accelerator pedal
❈ The actual interior in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
2 4
OUB021001K
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster.............................4-43
2. Horn .................................................4-39
3. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-44
4. Light control/Turn signals .................4-73
5. Wiper/Washer...................................4-77
6. Ignition switch or ENGINE START/
STOP button .................................5-5, 5-7
7. Hazard warning flasher switch ......4-72, 6-2
8. Audio ..............................................4-121
9. Climate control system...............4-84, 94
10. Shift lever...............................5-13, 5-16
11. Steering wheel audio control........4-122
12. Passenger’s front air bag ...............3-44
13. Glove box .....................................4-110
14. Parking brake lever ........................5-24
15. Power outlet .................................4-117
16. Cigarette lighter ............................4-114
17. Seat warmer .....................................3-8
❈ The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OUB025002N
2 5
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine Coolant Reservoir ................7-36
2. Engine Oil Filler Cap ........................7-34
3. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir ...........7-39
4. Air Cleaner .......................................7-41
5. Fuse Box ..........................................7-62
6. Negative Battery Terminal ................7-45
7. Positive Battery Terminal..................7-45
8. Radiator Cap ....................................7-37
9. Engine Oil Dipstick ...........................7-34
10. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir..7-40
* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OUB071103N
2 6
Seat / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-14
Child restraint system / 3-25
Airbag-advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-33
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT
Driver’s seat
(1) Forward and rearward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Seat warmer
(5) Headrest
Front passenger’s seat
(6) Forward and rearward
(7) Seatback angle
(8) Seat warmer
(9) Headrest
Rear seat
(10) Headrest
(11) Seatback folding
■ 5 door
■ 4 door
❈ The actual seats in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3 2
OUB035001N
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose objects
Do not place anything in the driver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the driver's
foot area could interfere with the
operation of the foot pedals.
WARNING - Driver responsibility for passengers
WARNING - Uprighting seat
Do not press the release lever on a
manual seatback without holding
and controlling the seatback. The
seatback will spring upright possibly
impacting you or other passengers.
WARNING- Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sitting
cushions. The passenger's hips
may slide under the lap portion of
the seat belt during an accident or
a sudden stop.
1KMN3661
The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion. If a seat is reclined
during an accident, the occupant's
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt, applying great
force to the unprotected abdomen.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control of
your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback and seatback adjustment.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable control
of your vehicle. A distance of at
least 10" from your chest to the
steering wheel is recommended.
Failure to do so can result in
airbag inflation injuries to the
driver.
3 3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Seat adjustment
WARNING - Unexpected
seat movement
• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat
forward will cause strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near the
seat bottom or seat track while
adjusting the seat. Your hand
could get caught in the seat
mechanism.
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front and
back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
OUB031002
WARNING - Small Objects
Use extreme caution when picking
small objects trapped under the
seats or between the seat and the
center console. Your hands might
be cut or injured by the sharp
edges of the seats mechanism.
3 4
Front seat adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Safety features of your vehicle
OUB031003
OUB031004
OUB031042N
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
(if equipped)
To change the height of the seat, move
the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push down
the lever several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the
lever several times.
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps protect the head and neck in
the event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of an
accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the
same height of the center of gravity of an
occupant's head. Generally, the center of
gravity of most people's head is similar
with the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to your
head as possible.
3 5
Safety features of your vehicle
For this reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed. Headrests
can provide critical neck and head
support in a crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest height
while the vehicle is in motion.
Driver may lose control of the
vehicle.
3 6
OUB031007
OUB031005
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
4 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest backwards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
OYFH034205
OUB034100
If you recline the seatback towards the
front with the headrest and seat cushion
raised, the headrest may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of
the vehicle.
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button (3)
while pulling the headrest up (4).
✽ NOTICE
3 7
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to the
head or neck, always make sure the
head rest is locked into position and
adjusted properly after reinstalling.
OUB034101
OUB031008
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate
height.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmers are provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather. With
the ignition switch in the ON position,
push either of the switches to warm the
driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
3 8
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
The seat warmer may cause burns,
even at low temperatures, if used
over a long period of time. Never
allow passengers who may not be
able to take care of themselves to
be exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns. These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
OUB031009
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s seatback.
WARNING - Seatback
pocket
Do not put heavy or sharp objects in
the seatback pocket. An occupant
could contact such objects in a
crash. Heavy objects in the front
passenger seatback could also interfere with the airbag sensing system.
3 9
Safety features of your vehicle
Also adjust the headrest as close to your
head as possible. For this reason, the
use of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not recommended.
OUB031043N
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with headrests
in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
To help maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the headrest is
at the same height of the center of gravity
of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height as the top of their eyes.
3 10
OUB031016N
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Safety features of your vehicle
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the
luggage capacity of the vehicle.
WARNING - Folded
Seatback
OUB031017N
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling the headrest upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height and ensure that
it locks in position.
WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded down
seatback should not extend higher
than the top of the front seatbacks.
This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage
during sudden stops.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the vehicle is moving. This is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop.
3 11
Safety features of your vehicle
OUB031049K
OUB031051K
OUB032049
To fold down the rear seatback:
• 4 door
1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing
is in the guide to prevent the seat belt
from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest
position.
4. Pull the lock release lever (1) and fold
the rear seatback forward and down
firmly.
If the seat belt remains extended after
returning the seatback to it's upright
position, pull the seatbelt outward and
release to retract the seatbelt.
• 5 door
1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing
is in the guide to prevent the seat belt
from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to lowest
position.
3 12
Safety features of your vehicle
OUB032018N
4. Pull the lock release lever (1) and fold
the rear seatback forward and down
firmly.
If the seat belt locks after unfolding the
rear seatback, pull out the locked seat
belt, release it then pull it out again.
To unfold the rear seat
1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Pull the seatback
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
If you can not see the red line at the
bottom of folding lever, it means the
seatback is locked completely.
2. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
3. When the seatback is completely
installed, check the seatback folding
lever again.
When returning the rear seatbacks to the
upright position, remember to return the
rear shoulder belts to their proper position.
WARNING - Rear seatback
When returning the rear seatback
from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it
slowly. Ensure that the seatback is
completely locked into its upright
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move forward
with great force and enter the passenger compartment.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in the
rear seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a frontal collision.
3 13
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the
bony structure of the body, and should
be worn low across the front of the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable;
wearing the lap section of the belt across
the abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly
as possible, consistent with comfort, to
provide the protection for which they
have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils
and chemicals, and particularly battery
acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be
used whenever the vehicle is moving.
A properly positioned shoulder belt
should be positioned midway over your
shoulder across your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. See child restraint
system section for further discussion.
WARNING - Shoulder belt
Never wear the shoulder belt under
your arm or behind your back. An
improperly positioned shoulder
belt cannot protect the occupant in
a crash.
WARNING - Damaged seat
belt
Replace the entire seat belt assembly if any part of the webbing or
hardware is damaged as you can
no longer be sure that a damaged
seat belt will provide protection in a
crash.
3 14
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted seat
belt may not properly protect you in
an accident and could even cut into
your body.
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material (gum,
crumbs, coins, etc.) to obstruct the
seat belt buckle. This may prevent
the seat belt from fastening securely.
Safety features of your vehicle
Conditions
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Unbuckled
1GQA2083
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light and
chime will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.
Unbuckled
ChimeSound
Light-Blink
6 seconds
Buckled
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Warning Pattern
6 seconds
None
Below 5 km/h
6 seconds
(3 mph)
None
5 km/h~
10 km/h
6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 seconds *1
↓
↓
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
Stop *2
OUB035014N
Seat belt warning
(for front passenger’s seat)
The front passenger's seat belt warning
light will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.
*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
3 15
Safety features of your vehicle
Conditions
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Warning Pattern
Light-Blink
Unbuckled
6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
Unbuckled
(6mph)
Continuously
Buckled
6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
(6mph)
Buckled →
Unbuckled Below 10 km/h
(6mph)
Continuously *1
None
*1 The seat belt warning light will go off if
the vehicle speed decreases below 5
km/h (3 mph). If the vehicle speed
increases above 5 km/h (3 mph), the
warning light will blink again.
• You can find the front passenger's seat
belt warning light on the center fascia
panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can blink
when a briefcase or purse is placed on
the front passenger seat.
3 16
Riding in an improper position adversely
affects the front passenger's seat belt
warning system. It is important for the
driver to instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as contained
in this manual.
B180A01NF-1
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
Safety features of your vehicle
If you are not able to pull out the seat belt
from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out
and release it. Then you will be able to
pull the belt out smoothly.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
Front seat
WARNING - Shoulder belt
position
OTA030017
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for
maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck. The
shoulder portion should be adjusted so
that it lies across your chest and midway
over your shoulder near the door and not
your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after being
in an accident. Failure to replace
seat belts after an accident could
leave you with damaged seat belts
that will not provide protection in
the event of another collision.
3 17
Safety features of your vehicle
B200A01NF
You should place the lap belt portion as
low as possible and snugly across your
hips. If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the chance of
injury in the event of a collision.
The arm closest to the seat belt buckle
should be over the belt while the other
arm should be under the belt as shown in
the illustration.
3 18
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear
seat 3-point system with combination
locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts are
installed in the rear seat positions to help
accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front
passenger seat position, it is strongly
recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER place
any infant restraint system in the front
seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat
belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab into the buckle. There will
be an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle. When not securing a
child restraint, the seat belt operates in
the same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended from
the retractor to allow the installation of a
child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract,
but not to extend (Automatic Locking
Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child
restraint system” in this section.
To convert from the automatic locking
feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt
to fully retract.
Safety features of your vehicle
OKIA037002
OUB037020N
B210A01NF-1
The seat belt should be locked into the
buckle on each seat cushion to be properly fastened.
❈ A : Rear right seat belt fastening buckle
B : Rear center seat belt fastening
buckle
C : Rear left seat belt fastening buckle
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) of the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
CAUTION
Make sure to lock the rear center
seat belt into the center seat belt
buckle.
If not, the improperly fastened seat
belt will not be able to provide protection.
3 19
Safety features of your vehicle
OMG035300
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions (or side collisions). The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated
in crashes, where the frontal collision is
severe enough.
3 20
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
1KMB3311A
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly
Safety features of your vehicle
Both the driver's and front passenger's
pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated
in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioners will not be activated if
the seat belts are not being worn at the
time of the collision.
✽ NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
WARNING - Skin irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which
the pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated. The fine dust from the
pre-tensioner activation may cause
skin irritation and should not be
breathed for prolonged periods.
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pretensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light ( ) on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and then
it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner seat belt does not
work properly, this warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag has not
malfunctioned. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,
please have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt or
SRS air bag system as soon as possible.
WARNING - Hot
pretensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt
mechanism fires during a collision
the pre-tensioner becomes hot and
can burn you.
Pre-tensioners are designed to operate
only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. If the
pre-tensioner must be replaced, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair the
pre-tensioner seat belt system in any
manner. Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat belts
yourself. This must be done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
3 21
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.
3 22
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check if the belt
fits periodically. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of an
accident when they are restrained by a
proper restraint system in the rear seat. If
a larger child (over age 12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be
securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to ride
in the vehicle without an appropriate child restraint system. If the
shoulder belt comes in contact with
your child's neck or face your child
is too small to ride in the vehicle. In
a crash the seat belt will inflict
injury to your child's neck, throat
and face.
Safety features of your vehicle
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible
according to specific recommendations
by their doctors. The lap portion of the
belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND
LOW AS POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the seat belt
above or on the abdomen where
the fetus is located. The force of the
seat belt during a collision will
crush the fetus.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system,
all passengers should be sitting up and
the front seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear seat
or if the front seat is in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING - Pinched seat
belt
Make sure that the webbing and/or
buckle does not get caught or
pinched in the rear seat when
returning the rear seatback to its
upright position. A caught or
pinched
webbing/buckle
may
become damaged and could fail
during a collision or sudden stop.
3 23
Safety features of your vehicle
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized Kia dealer.
3 24
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the safety standards of
your country.
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by seat belt,
or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH
anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your vehicle
seat and seat belts, and fits your child.
Follow all the instructions provided by the
manufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING- Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant seat
on the front passenger's seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by
an inflating airbag.
WARNING- Hot child
restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day. Be
sure to check the seat cover, buckles and latches before placing a
child in the restraint system.
When the child restraint system is not in
use, store it in the luggage area or fasten
it with a seat belt so that it will not be
thrown forward in case of a sudden stop
or an accident.
3 25
Safety features of your vehicle
Rearward-facing child restraint system
WARNING - Holding
children
Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint system
which is appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time. This
will eliminate any safety benefit
provided by the seat belt to the
occupants.
CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended in
a vehicle. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in injuries to the
child in the vehicle.
OUB031012N
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3 26
Safety features of your vehicle
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and only
lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock mode), you must
manually change these seat belts to the
auto lock mode to secure a child
restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufacturers
know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instructions provided with the child
restraint system could result in
the improper installation of the
child restraint system which may
reduce the protection to your
child in a crash or a sudden stop.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle headrest prevents proper
installation of a child seat (as described
in the child seat system manual), the
headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely
removed.
E2MS103005
Lacing a passenger seat belt into the
auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent the
normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen
and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system,
use the following procedure.
3 27
Safety features of your vehicle
OEN036101
OEN036102
OEN036103
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat
belt all the way out. When the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the “Auto
Lock” (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the seat belt to retract and listen for an
audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.
This indicates that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
3 28
Safety features of your vehicle
Therefore, the preceding seven steps
must be followed each time a child
restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then pull
the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint
and allow the seat belt to retract fully.
■ 4 door
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
OEN036104
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the seat belt and repeat steps
2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to
pull more of the seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode.
The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns
to the “emergency lock mode” whenever
the belt is allowed to retract fully.
Set the retractor to Automatic Lock
mode when installing any child
restraint system.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
OUB031050K
■ 5 door (Type A)
OUB031010
■ 5 door (Type B)
OUB031011
3 29
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat with
tether anchorage system
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the floor behind the rear seats.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the child restraint
seat.
WARNING - Tether strap
OUB031013N
1. Route the child restraint seat tether
strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
3 30
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break.
Check that the child restraint system is
secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.
Safety features of your vehicle
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
1SAE3090A
OUB031039N
OUN036140L
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
LATCH or LATCH-compatible child
restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children". These
seats include two rigid or webbing
mounted attachments that connect to
two LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the need to
use seat belts to attach the child seat in
the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located on
the left and right rear seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for
child restraints.
LATCH anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located between
the seatback and the seat cushion of the
rear seat left and right outboard seating
positions.
When you install your child's restraint
system using the LATCH anchors buckle
the shoulder lap belt, then lock the
retractor and pull the belt to remove the
slack in the belt so it lies flat against the
vehicle seat.
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts behind
the child restraint seat when they
are not used to secure the child
seat. Failure to do so may result in
child strangulation.
3 31
Safety features of your vehicle
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or LATCHcompatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the LATCH and tether
anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat before
you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from
side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold
the seat in place.
3 32
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center seating
position. LATCH lower anchors are
only to be used with the left and
right rear outboard seating positions.
You may damage the
anchors or the anchors may fail
and break in a collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Side impact air bag
Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you and
your passengers must always wear the
safety belts provided in order to minimize
the risk and severity of injury in the event
of a collision or rollover.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYF039050
3 33
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bag are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
the appropriate position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side impact air bag or
curtain air bag) in order to help protect
the occupants from serious physical
injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of complex factors including
vehicle speed, angles of impact and
the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits
in the collision. Though, factors are not
limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
3 34
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of extremely
short time in which a collision occurs
and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or lifethreatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Airbag
inflation
Sit as far back as possible from the
steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of your
vehicle. A distance of at least 10"
from your chest to the steering
wheel is recommended. Failure to
do so can result in airbag inflation
injuries to the driver.
Safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest to both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after the impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with the cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if the
symptom persists.
WARNING - Hot components
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components immediately after airbag inflation. The air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the
roof rails above the front and rear
doors are very hot. Hot components can result in burn injuries.
1JBH3051
Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger’s seat is forbidden
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
3 35
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, install the child restraint
system as far away from the door
side as possible. Inflation of the
side and/or curtain air bags could
impact the child.
W7-147
3 36
OUB031041N
Air bag warning light
SRS components and functions
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
The SRS consists of the following components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator (Front passenger’s seat only)
11. Occupant
detection
system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
Safety features of your vehicle
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt buckle sensors
13. Anchor pre-tensioner assemblies
*: if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
air bag warning light should go out.
If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.
Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect
the air bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Driver’s front air bag (2)
B240B01L
B240B02L
The air bag modules are located both in
the center of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
3 37
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (3)
✽ NOTICE
Passenger’s front air bag
Before you replace a fuse or disconnect
a battery terminal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position and
remove the ignition key. Never remove
or replace the air bag related fuse(s)
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warning light
to illuminate.
B240B03L
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the
ability to steer or operate other controls.
3 38
B240B05L
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any accessories on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, or on the front
passenger's panel above the glove
box in a vehicle Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles if
the air bag deploys.
Safety features of your vehicle
OUB035037N
Occupant detection system
Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The driver's front air bag is not affected
or controlled by the occupant detection
system.
Main components of occupant detection system
• A detection device located within the
front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag systems
should be activated or deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the
words PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicating the front passenger air bag
system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning
light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by
a person that the system determines to
be of adult size, and he/she sits properly
(sitting upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the
floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator will turn off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if
necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator on the center facia panel.
This system detects the conditions 1~4
in the following table and activates or
deactivates the front passenger air bag
based on these conditions.
3 39
Safety features of your vehicle
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and
wearing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air bag
and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection System)
may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can defeat the
detection system. These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front
of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which
reduce the passenger weight on the
front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
3 40
Safety features of your vehicle
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by the occupant
detection system
Devices
PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passenger
air bag
Off
Off
Activated
On
Off
Deactivated
3. Unoccupied
On
Off
Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system
Off
On
Activated
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2
2. Infant or child restraint system
with 12 months old*3 *4
WARNING - ODS system
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the occupant
detection system (ODS) and may
result in the deactivation of front
passenger airbag. It is important for
the driver to instruct the passenger
as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.
(Continued)
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than
the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above
12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front
passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
3 41
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
B990A08O
1KMN3663
1KMN3665
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never sit with the hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never place the feet on the dashboard.
OVQ036014N
1KMN3662
1KMN3664
- Never place the feet on the front
passenger seatback.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
- Never lean on the door or center
console.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
3 42
Safety features of your vehicle
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is still on, ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat.
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
B990A01O
When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask
the passenger to sit properly (sitting
upright with the seat back in an upright
position, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor).
Restart the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow the
system to detect the person and to
enable the passenger air bag.
Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
is illuminated, because the air bag
will not deploy in the event of a
crash. The driver must instruct the
passenger to reposition himself in
the seat. Failure to properly position yourself may lead to airbag
deactivation resulting in airbag
non-deployment and in a collision.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator remains illuminated after
the passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is
restarted, it is recommended that
passenger move to the rear seat
because the passenger's front air
bag will not deploy.
✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant detection sensor
will then classify the front passenger
after several more seconds.
3 43
Safety features of your vehicle
Any child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large for
child restraints should use the available
lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type
of crash, children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or
attach anything such as a blanket, front
seat covers or after market seat heater
to the front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant detection
system.
If the occupant detection system is not
working properly, the SRS air bag warning light
on the instrument panel will
illuminate because the passenger's front
air bag is connected with the occupant
detection system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant detection system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's
front air bag will inflate in frontal impact
crashes even if there is no occupant in
the front passenger's seat.
Driver’s front air bag
OUB031026
Passenger’s front air bag
OUB031027
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air
Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at
both the driver and passenger seating
position.
3 44
Safety features of your vehicle
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage
level is provided for more severe impacts.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather
information about the driver's seat position, the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
The passenger’s front air bag is designed
to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instrument panel in low
speed collisions. However, children are
safer if they are restraint in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity, seating
position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM
(SRS Control Module) controls the air
bag inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat. The occupant
detection system detects the presence of
a passenger in the front passenger's seat
and will turn off the front passenger's air
bag under certain conditions. For more
detail, see "Occupant detection system"
in this section.
Do not place any objects that may cause
magnetic fields near the front seat. These
may cause a malfunction of the seat
track position sensor.
3 45
Safety features of your vehicle
Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a contact
point concerning modifications to the
vehicle for persons with disabilities,
which modifications may affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag system.
However, Kia does not endorse nor will it
support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including the
occupant detection system.
✽ NOTICE
The front passenger seat, dashboard or
door should not be replaced except by
an authorized Kia dealer using original
Kia parts designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replacement or
modification could adversely affect the
operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags.
Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide
enhanced occupant protection in frontal
crashes. Front air bags are not intended
to deploy in collisions in which sufficient
protection can be provided by the pretensioner seat belt alone.
Rear impact
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components of
the SRS system. Doing so could
result in injury, due to accidental
deployment of the air bags or by
rendering the SRS inoperative.
Front air bags are not intended to deploy
in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover
crashes. In addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below the
deployment threshold.
OUB035044N
Side impact
OUB035045N
Rollover
OUB035046N
3 46
Safety features of your vehicle
Side impact air bag
Front
WARNING - No attaching
objects
OUB031030
No objects (such as crash pad cover,
cellular phone holder, cup holder,
perfume or stickers) should be
placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel above
the glove box. Such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the air bags
to deploy. Do not place any objects
over the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
The side impact air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The
side air bags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
OLM032310L
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unexpected
deployment of the side impact air
bag.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
3 47
Safety features of your vehicle
The side impact air bag is supplemental
to the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute for
them. Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times while the vehicle is in
operation.
For best protection from the side air bag
system and to avoid being injured by the
deploying side air bag, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.
The driver's hands should be placed on
the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
positions. The passenger's arms and
hands should be placed on their laps.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the side
or near the side impact air bag as
this may affect the deployment of
the side air bags.
3 48
If seat or seat cover is damaged, have
the vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. Inform that your
vehicle is equipped with side impact air
bags and an occupant detection system.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles if the side airbag
inflates.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area the
air bag inflates such as the door,
side door glass, front and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects between
the door and the seat. They may
become dangerous projectiles if
the side air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
OUB031019
OLM032311L
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Curtain air bag
✽ NOTICE
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most
rollover situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean their
heads or bodies onto doors, put their
arms on the doors, stretch their arms out
of the window, or place objects between
the doors and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain air bag system.
This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag. Also, do not attach any
objects around the area the air
bag inflates such as the door, side
door glass, front and rear pillar,
roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the clothes hanger.
3 49
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
1
2
3
3
OUB035031N/OUB031032/OUB035040N/OUB031033/OUB031047N
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
3 50
(3) Side impact sensor
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Air bag
sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bag or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the
deformation of the front bumper, body or
B pillar where side collision sensors are
installed. Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
Installing aftermarket bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-genuine
parts may adversely affect your vehicle’s
collision and air bag deployment performance.
1VQA2084
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
3 51
Safety features of your vehicle
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
OUB035045N
OLM032311L
3 52
Side air bags
Side air bags (side impact and/or curtain
air bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate in frontal collisions, they also
may inflate in other types of collisions if
the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of
impact. Side impact and curtain air bags
are designed to inflate in certain side
impact collisions. They may inflate in
other type of collisions where a side force
is detected by the sensors.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
1VQA2086
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
Safety features of your vehicle
OUN036087
OUB035045N
1VQA2089
• Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
• In a slant or angled collision, the force
of impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
3 53
Safety features of your vehicle
1VQA2090
OUB035046N
1VQA2092
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be significantly replaced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags do not inflate in most rollover
accidents, even though the vehicle is
equipped with side impact air bags and
curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
3 54
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel must be performed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use
only a soft, dry cloth or one which has
been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components of
the SRS system. Doing so could
result in the accidental inflation of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
If components of the air bag system must
be discarded, or if the vehicle must be
scrapped, certain safety precautions
must be observed. An authorized Kia
dealer knows these precautions and can
give you the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precautions and
procedures could increase the risk of
personal injury.
3 55
Safety features of your vehicle
OAM039041
OUB031035N
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required by
the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS), are attached to the
sunvisor to alert the driver and passengers
of potential risks of the air bag system.
3 56
Keys / 4-3
Smart key / 4-5
Remote keyless entry / 4-8
Theft-alarm system / 4-13
Door locks / 4-16
Trunk / 4-20
Tailgate / 4-22
Windows / 4-24
Features of your vehicle
Hood / 4-28
Fuel filler lid / 4-30
Sunroof / 4-33
Steering wheel / 4-37
Mirrors / 4-40
Instrument cluster / 4-43
Rear-Camera Display / 4-71
Hazard warning flasher / 4-72
Lighting / 4-73
Wipers and washers / 4-77
Interior light / 4-81
Defroster / 4-83
Manual climate control system / 4-84
Automatic climate control system / 4-94
4
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-105
Storage compartment / 4-110
Interior features / 4-114
Audio system / 4-121
4
Features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
KEYS
Record your key number
■ Type B
■ Type A
The key code number
is stamped on the key
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an authorized Kia
dealer to duplicate the keys easily.
Remove the key code tag and store it in
a safe place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and handy
place, but not in the vehicle.
OFD047002-A/OED036001A
OTF044369
Type A
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
Type B
To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
Key operations
CAUTION - Key button
operation
Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may
damage the key.
4 3
Features of your vehicle
■ Type C
WARNING - Aftermarket
keys
Use only Kia original parts for the
ignition key in your vehicle. If an
aftermarket key is used, the ignition
switch may not return to ON after
START. If this happens, the starter
will continue to operate causing
possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.
OXMA043316
❈ The actual feature may differ from the illustration.
Type C
To remove the mechanical key, press and
hold the release button and remove the
mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a click
sound is heard.
4 4
WARNING - Ignition key
(Smart key)
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with
unsupervised
children.
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with a manual ignition key
or a smart key is dangerous.
Children copy adults and they
could place the key in the ignition
switch or press the start button.
The key would enable children to
operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in serious
bodily injury or death. result in serious bodily injury or death.
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors. Also, you may
start the engine. Refer to the following,
for more details.
OYDDCO2004
OUB041004
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door and even start the engine without
inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. (Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.)
Locking
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors closed and
any door unlocked, locks all the doors.
The hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound once to indicate that
all doors are locked. The button will only
operate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make sure
that a door has locked or not, you should
check the door lock button inside the
vehicle or pull the outside door handle.
4 5
Features of your vehicle
Even though you press the button, the
doors will not lock and the chime will
sound for 3 seconds if any of the following occurs:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
• Any door except the trunk (or tailgate)
is opened.
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the driver's outside door handle with all doors closed
and locked, unlocks the driver's door. The
hazard warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound twice to indicate that the
driver's door is unlocked. All doors are
unlocked if the button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will
sound twice to indicate that all the doors
are unlocked.
Pressing the button in the front passenger's outside door handle with all doors
closed and locked, unlocks all the doors.
The hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound twice to indicate that
all doors are unlocked. The button will
only operate when the smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle.
Trunk unlocking (4 door)
The trunk is opened if the trunk unlock
button is pressed.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.
If the trunk is closed with the smart key in
the trunk, the warning chime will sound
for about 5 seconds and the trunk will not
lock.
Tailgate unlocking (5 door)
(if equipped)
If you are within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the
outside tailgate handle, with your smart
key in possession, the tailgate will unlock
and open when you press the tailgate
handle switch.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
“Starting the engine with a smart key” in
section 5.
4 6
Features of your vehicle
Smart key precautions
• If you lose your smart key, you will not
be able to start the engine. Tow the
vehicle, if necessary, and contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and key to your
authorized Kia dealer to protect it from
potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key near a mobile two-way
radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the
mechanical key. If you have a problem
with the smart key, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the smart key is in close proximity to
your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone is
active such as making calls, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the
smart key and your cell phone or smart
phone in the same pants or jacket
pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not function
properly.
This device complies`with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
4 7
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
OAM041096L
■ Type B
OUB041003N
■ Type C
OXM049001L
Remote keyless entry system
operations
4 8
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button is
pressed. If all doors (and trunk or tailgate) are closed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once to indicate that all
doors (and trunk or tailgate) are locked.
Also, if the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will
sound once to confirm that the door is
locked.
However, if any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights (and/or the chime)
will not operate. But if all doors are
closed after the lock button is pressed,
the hazard warning lights will blink once.
Unlock (2)
The driver's door is unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once. The hazard
warning lights will blink (for smart key, the
chime also sounds) twice to indicate that
the driver's door is unlocked.
All doors are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink
(for smart key, the chime also sounds)
twice again to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. After pressing this button, the
doors will lock automatically unless you
open any door within 30 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or liquids, it
will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.
Trunk (tailgate) open (3) (if equipped)
The trunk (tailgate) is opened if the button is pressed for more than 1 second.
Once the trunk (tailgate) is opened and
then closed, the trunk (tailgate) will lock
automatically.
Alarm (4)
The horn sounds and the hazard warning
lights blink for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed for more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the transmitter.
Features of your vehicle
Transmitter precautions
The transmitter (or smart key) will not
work if any of following occurs:
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
• You exceed the operating distance limit
(about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter (or smart
key) is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is close
to a radio transmitter such as a radio
station or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter (or smart key) does
not work properly, open and close the
door with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter (or smart
key), contact an authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity to
your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone is
active such as making calls, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
4 9
Features of your vehicle
1. Pry open the transmitter or smart key
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
■ Type A
OED039003A
■ Type B, C
OSL040005
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several years,
but if the transmitter or smart key is not
working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
4 10
The transmitter or smart key is designed
to give you years of trouble-free use,
however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the battery,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
Using the wrong battery can cause the
transmitter or smart key to malfunction.
Be sure to use the correct battery.
An inappropriately disposed battery can
be harmful to the environment and
human health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the keyless entry system transmitter to
heat or sunlight.
IC WARNING
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
OED036001A
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce
the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies that the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
Your Immobilizer password is a customer
unique password and should be kept
confidential. Do not leave this number
anywhere in your vehicle.
Do not put metal accessories near the
ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent the
engine from being started.
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This may
damage your immobilizer.
✽ NOTICE
Keep each key separately in order to
avoid a starting malfunction.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.
4 11
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
4 12
Limp home (override) procedure
When you turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, if the immobilizer indicator
(
) goes off after blinking 5 times,
your transponder equipped in the ignition
key is out of order. You cannot start the
engine without the limp home procedure.
To start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch. Your password is only available
from an authorized Kia dealership.
Contact an authorized dealer for more
information.
The following procedure is how to input
your password of “2345” as an example.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The immobilizer indicator (
)
will blink 5 times and go off indicating
the beginning of the limp home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
3. To enter the first digit (in this example
“2”), turn the ignition switch to the ON
and ACC position twice. Perform the
same procedure for the next digits
between 3 seconds and 10 seconds
(for example, for “3”, turn the ignition
ON and ACC 3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input successfully, you have to start the engine
within 30 seconds. If you attempt to
start the engine after 30 seconds, the
engine will not start and you will have
to input your password again.
After performing the limp home procedure, you have to see an authorized Kia
dealer immediately to inspect and repair
your ignition key or immobilizer system.
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed stage
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)
and engine hood are closed and
latched.
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmitter (or
smart key).
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, tailgate or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won’t operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After this, if all doors, tailgate and engine hood are closed, the
hazard warning lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handles with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door remains open, the hazard
warning lights won’t operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. Close the
door and try again to lock the doors.
If tailgate or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights won’t
operate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the tailgate or engine hood.
The hazard warning lights blink once
and theft-alarm arms.
* The THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM is not
applied to the trunk lid of 4door (sedan)
vehicles.
4 13
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Theft-alarm stage
Disarmed stage
The theft-alarm system by the key can be
activated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the transmitter (or smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 27 seconds. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the transmitter (or smart key).
The system will be disarmed when:
Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the vehicle. If any
door (or tailgate) or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after the
system enters the armed stage, the
system will be disarmed to prevent
unnecessary alarm.
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)
- The ignition switch is in the “ON” position for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door is
pressed while carrying the smart key.
- The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
4 14
Features of your vehicle
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position and wait for 30 seconds. Then the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch and start the engine. Then
the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
4 15
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
■ Type A
Unlock
Lock
OUB041005
■ Type B
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle once to
unlock the driver’s door and once more
within 4 seconds to unlock all doors. (if
equipped)
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key (or
smart key). (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure the doors are
closed securely.
✽ NOTICE
OUB041004
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a key,
all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically.
4 16
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
OUB041183N
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (2, if equipped) to the
“Lock” position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors
will lock automatically. (if equipped with
central door lock system)
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle
unattended.
Features of your vehicle
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button
will unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch (or
if the smart key is in the vehicle) and
any front door is opened. (if equipped)
Lock
Unlock
OUB041009
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not show.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
If a power door lock ever fails to function
while you are in the vehicle, try one or
more of the following techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the
door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the key
to unlock the door from outside.
Driver’s door
Passenger’s door
OUB041010/OUB041180N
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
Operate by pressing the central door lock
switch.
• Press the switch to the "Lock" position
(1), all vehicle doors will lock.
• Press the switch to the "Unlock" position (2), all vehicle doors will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or if
the smart key is in the vehicle) and any
front door is opened, the doors will not
lock when the “Lock” position (1) of the
central door lock switch is pressed. (if
equipped)
4 17
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehicle
is in motion to prevent accidental
opening of the door.
WARNING - Unattended
children/
animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle.
4 18
Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock when
an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
(if equipped)
• All doors will automatically lock when
the transaxle shift lever is shifted out of
P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the transaxle shift lever is shifted
into P (Park).
An authorized Kia dealer can activate or
deactivate some auto door lock/ unlock
features as follows;
• Auto door unlock by using the driver's
door lock button
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the
transaxle shift lever out of P (Park) or
into P (Park)
• Auto door unlock when the ignition key
is removed from the ignition switch (for
smart key, when the ENGINE
START/STOP button is turned to the
OFF position)
If you want to activate or deactivate some
door lock/unlock feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle until the rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
OUB041011
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be used
whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole and turn it to the lock position.
The child safety lock (1) is located on
the rear edge of the door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock position,
rear door will not open even when the
inner door handle is pulled.
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the vehicle. If a child accidently opens the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, he/she can fall out.
4 19
Features of your vehicle
TRUNK (4 DOOR)
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening the trunk.
CAUTION
ORB040006
Opening the trunk
With the trunk lid release lever
To open the trunk from inside the vehicle,
pull up the trunk lid release lever.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk is locked automatically.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
4 20
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
trunk lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the trunk is not closed
prior to driving.
OUB041203K
With the key and the transmitter
To open the trunk, insert the key and turn
it clockwise to unlock.
Features of your vehicle
Closing the trunk
To close, lower the trunk lid, then press
down on it until it locks. To be sure the
trunk lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up again.
WARNING - Exhaust
Fumes
OUB045203K
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk release cable located inside
the trunk. If someone is inadvertently
locked in the trunk, pulling this handle will
release the trunk latch mechanism and
open the trunk.
The trunk lid should always be kept
completely closed while the vehicle
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
exhaust gases may enter the car
and serious illness or death may
result.
WARNING
No one should be allowed to occupy the trunk at any time. The trunk
is a very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
4 21
Features of your vehicle
TAILGATE
The tailgate swings upward. Make sure
no objects or people are near the rear of
the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
CAUTION - Tailgate lift
cylinders
OUB045012L
Opening the tailgate
■ Type A
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked by
turning the key to the "Lock" or
"Unlock" position.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and than
pulling up the hatch.
OUB045013L
■ Type B
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the transmitter (or smart key) or
central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it
up.
• All doors are locked if the tailgate
unlock button on the smart key is
pressed for more than 1 second and
the tailgate is unlocked. Once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the
tailgate is locked automatically.
❈ There is no key hole on this type.
4 22
Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
Driving with the tailgate open is not
advisable. Dangerous exhaust
fumes can enter the passenger
compartment.
If you must drive with the tailgate
opened, keep the air vents and all
windows open so that additional
outside air can enter.
OUB045014L
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of the
way before closing the tailgate.
CAUTION- Closing tailgate
Make sure nothing is near the tailgate latch and striker while closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.
OUB045015L
WARNING - Riding in
cargo area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. Occupants should
always be properly restrained to
avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops.
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment, the tailgate can
be opened by doing as follows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
4 23
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window switch*
(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch*
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch*
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window down*
(7) Power window lock button*
*: if equipped
OUB041016
4 24
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. The driver has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
second period.
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open) position,
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise
is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
Window opening and closing
(if equipped)
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, momentarily pull up the switch
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
4 25
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.
WARNING
OTA040015
OUN026013
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is released.
To stop the window at the desired position
while the window is in operation, pull up
or press and release the switch to the
opposite direction of the movement.
If the power window is not operated correctly, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling
up on the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the window is
completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
4 26
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Opening /
closing Window
To prevent possible damage to the
power window system, do not open
or close two windows or more at the
same time. This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
WARNING - Power
OUB041020
Power window lock button
(if equipped)
• The driver can disable the power window switches on the passenger doors
by pressing the power window lock
switch, located on the driver’s door to
the LOCK position (pressed).
• When the power window lock button
is in the LOCK position (pressed),
the driver’s master control cannot
operate the passenger door power
windows.
windows
Do not allow children to play with the
power windows. Keep the driver’s
door power window lock switch in
the LOCK position (pressed).
Always double check to make sure all
arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before
closing a window.
OSA028222
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the
window regulator handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
When closing the windows, make sure
your passenger's arms, hands and body
are safely out of the way.
4 27
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
OUB041021
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift
lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to the 1st(First) gear or
R(Reverse) for manual transaxle, and
setting the parking brake.
4 28
OUB045022L
OUB041023
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, push the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3. Pull out the support rod from the hood.
4. Hold the hood opened with the support
rod.
WARNING - Hot parts
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The plastic will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is
hot.
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the following:
• All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm
(1 ft.) above the closed position and let
it drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
WARNING - Fire risk
WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole whenever you
inspect the engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so may
cause a heat-induced fire.
4 29
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks” one time. This indicates that
the cap is securely one time tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in
lightly and make sure that it is securely closed.
WARNING - Refueling
OUB041024
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel
filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
4 30
OUB041025
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel
filler lid opener up.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel
filler cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting
fuel or if you hear a hissing sound,
wait until the condition stops before
completely removing the cap.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can
cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and burns.
✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks one time,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator
light will illuminate.
Features of your vehicle
Always check that the fuel cap is installed
securely to prevent fuel spillage in the
event of an accident.
WARNING - Fire/explosion
risk
Read and follow all warnings posted
at the gas station facility. Failure to
follow all warnings will result in
severe personal injury, severe burns
or death due to fire or explosion.
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle once
you have begun refueling since
you can generate static electricity
by touching, rubbing or sliding
against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of
producing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can ignite
fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or
other gasoline source.
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place the
container on the ground prior to
refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, contact
with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.
Use only approved portable plastic
fuel containers designed to carry
and store gasoline.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
4 31
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling&
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to the
engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler
cap and filler door are securely
closed, before starting the engine.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at a
gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when ignited,
result in fire.
4 32
Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested
in section 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replacement,
use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious
malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel
spilled on painted surfaces may
damage the paint.
Features of your vehicle
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the sunroof,
periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
OAM049018
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may
not work properly due to freezing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that
is on the sunroof before operating it.
CAUTION - Sunroof control
lever
Do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the
tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an
open or slide position.
WARNING - Sunroof
operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in the
movement range of the sliding roof.
Parts of the body could become
trapped or crushed.
4 33
Features of your vehicle
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will slide all the
way open.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
OUB041027
Sliding the sunroof
To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof
control lever backward.
To close the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever forward.
4 34
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will automatically
close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
While driving with the sunroof in an open
(or partially open position), your vehicle
may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal
occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If
you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the
sunroof opening
OBK049018
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof before
closing it.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Sunroof
operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in the
movement range of the sliding roof.
Parts of the body could become
trapped or crushed.
Do not extend the face, neck, arms or
body outside the sunroof while driving.
With the sunroof open for an extended
period of time, dirt may accumulate on
the guide rails causing noise during
opening and closing. Periodically remove
dirt using a clean cloth.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
OUB041028
Tilting the sunroof
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward until the sunroof
moves to the desired position.
To close the sunroof, push the sunroof
lever forward or pull downward until the
sunroof moves to the desired position.
If you try to open the sunroof when
the temperature is below freezing or
when the sunroof is covered with
snow or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
4 35
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:
OBK049019
Sunshade
When opening the sunroof, the sunshade
will also open. Once the sunroof is
closed, the sunshade can be manually
closed.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and close the sunroof completely.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Push and hold the control lever forward
(for more than 10 seconds) until the
sunroof tilts and slightly moves. Then,
release the lever.
4. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the
control lever forward (for more than 5
seconds) until the sunroof is operated
as follows;
TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE
CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.
4 36
❈ For more detailed information, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, the
sunroof may operate improperly.
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering
✽ NOTICE
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is controlled by the power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for better control of the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort is high immediately after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuously
when the vehicle is not in motion.
However, after a few minutes, it will
return to its normal conditions.
• When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperature, abnormal noise
could occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will disappear. This is a normal
condition.
If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warning
light will illuminate on the instrument
cluster. The steering wheel may become
difficult to control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
4 37
Features of your vehicle
Tilt and telescoping (if equipped)
steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.
OUB041029
WARNING - Steering wheel
adjustment
Never adjust the angle and height
of the steering wheel while driving.
You may lose steering control
4 38
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and height (if equipped) (3), then pull
up the lock-release lever to lock the
steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust
the steering wheel to the desired position
before driving.
OUB041030
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering
wheel button warms the steering wheel.
The indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the steering wheel off, press the
button once again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
It will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
If the ignition is turned off and then on
again within a half hour (while the heated
steering wheel button is pressed), the
steering wheel heating system will
remain on.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated steering wheel, do not use an organic
solvent such as paint thinner,
benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the surface of the steering wheel.
• If the surface of steering wheel is
damaged by sharp object, damage to the heated steering wheel
components could occur.
OUB041031
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the
horn regularly to be sure it operates
properly.
To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will
operate only when this area is pressed.
4 39
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Outside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window is
seen. Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
which would interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both lefthand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch (if
equipped). The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through
a narrow street.
Night
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control.
4 40
Day
OAM049023
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights of the
vehicles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Features of your vehicle
The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or direct
observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.
Move the lever (1) to R or L to select the
right side mirror or the left side mirror,
then press a corresponding point on the
mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the lever into
neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.
■ Type A
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not force
the mirror for adjustment.To remove
ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge
or soft cloth with very warm water.
OUB041032
■ Type B
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control.
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the related
parts.
OUB041033
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror the
ignition switch should be in the ACC or
ON position.
4 41
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
OUB041034
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric Type (if equipped)
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
depress the button.
To unfold it, depress the button again.
4 42
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust
the mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
OUB041035
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Fuel gauge
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge
6. Warning and indicator lights
■ Type B
7. Shift position indicator (A/T) or
Manual transaxle shift indicator (M/T)
8. Odometer/Trip computer
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
OUB044036C/OUB042037C
4 43
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
OUB041040
OUB041038
■ Type B
OUB041045N
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, push upward or
downward the illumination control knob
to adjust the brightness of the instrument
panel illumination.
The brightness of the instrument panel
(Type B) illumination can be adjusted by
rotating the control knob when the ignition switch is in ON position.
OUB041043
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilometers per hour and/or miles per hour.
4 44
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ACC or
ON position with the engine OFF. This
movement is normal and will not affect
the accuracy of the tachometer once the
engine is running.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OUB042048N
OUB042047N
Engine coolant temperature gauge
(for supervisim cluster)
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond the
normal range area toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in
section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
4 45
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Fuel gauge
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
■ Type B
It is forbidden to alter the odometer of
all vehicles with the intent to change the
mileage registered on the odometer. The
alteration may void your warranty coverage.
Stop and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the E level.
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
4 46
OUB041050C
Odometer
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Cluster Type A
OUB041049
■ Type B
■ Cluster Type B
TRIP A
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP B
Distance to empty
Distance to empty
Average fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Instant fuel consumption
Instant fuel consumption
Average speed
Average speed
Elapsed time
Elapsed time
OUB041174
Trip computer (Tripmeter)
(if equipped)
The trip computer is a microcomputercontrolled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. All stored driving information
(except distance to empty and instant
fuel consumption) will reset if the battery
is disconnected.
Outside temperature
4 47
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
OUB041051C
Tripmeter
TRIP A: Tripmeter A
TRIP B: Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last tripmeter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or
TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the
tripmeter to zero (0.0).
4 48
■ Type B
OUB041052C
Distance to empty
This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 1 km (1
miles), “---” will be displayed and the distance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 1 to
999 km (1 to 990 miles).
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupted, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUB041053C
OUB042054C
OUB041055C
Average fuel consumption
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 mile).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consumption is displayed, clears the average fuel
consumption to zero (---).
Instant fuel consumption
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption during the last few seconds.
Average speed
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is displayed, clears the average speed to zero
(---).
✽ NOTICE
You must drive more than 10 km/h (6
MPH) (type A) or 5 km/h (3 MPH) (type
B) for this mode to calculate the instant
fuel consumption.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h (0.6
MPH) after refueled more than 6 l, the
average fuel consumption will be cleared
to zero (---).
4 49
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
OUB041056C
OUB041057C
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last elapsed time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
elapsed time keeps going while the
engine is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the elapsed time is being
displayed, clears the elapsed time to
zero (0:00).
Outside temperature (if equipped)
This mode indicates the outside temperature around the vehicle.
The meter's working range is from -40°C
to 60°C (-40°F to 140°F).
4 50
Type A
To change the outside temperature display unit (°C ↔ °F), press the RESET
button more than 1 second in this mode.
Type B
To Change the outside temperature display unit (°C ↔ °F), see the following
pages in Vehicle Option section.
■ Type B
OUB041176N
Manual transaxle shift indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUB041177N
Automatic transaxle shift position
indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
■ Type B
OUB041062
Illumination intensity
The illumination intensity of the instrument panel is shown when adjusting it
with the illumination control switch.
For more details, refer to “Instrument
panel illumination” in section 4.
OUB041069
User Settings (only for Type B
cluster, if equipped)
1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition switch
in the ON position or engine running.
2. Press the TRIP button until the User
setting is displayed.
3. With the User setting displayed, press
the TRIP button for 2 seconds.
4. You can change the item by pressing
the TRIP button and select an item by
pressing the RESET button.
4 51
Features of your vehicle
OUB041064
Car option (only for Type B cluster, if equipped)
1. When the vehicle is at a standstill,
pressing the TRIP button for more than
2 seconds with the ENGINE
START/STOP button in the ON position or engine running, the LCD display
on the cluster will change to the "User
Setting" mode.
You can move to items by pressing the
TRIP button and select the item by
pressing the RESET button.
2. In the "User Setting" mode, select
"Vehicle Option".
3. Move (TRIP button) to the desired item
and select (RESET button).
4 52
OUB041065
OUB041066
Align steering wheel
(Steering position) (if equipped)
On - The warning illuminates on the LCD
display when the steering wheel is
not aligned with the ENGINE
START/STOP button in the ON
position.
Off - The warning does not illuminate on
the LCD display when the steering
wheel is not aligned with the
ENGINE START/STOP button in the
ON position.
Outside temperature unit
(if equipped)
You can exchange the outside temperature unit °C ↔ °F.
Features of your vehicle
OUB041067
Language
Choose a language you prefer within the
LCD display.
OUB042068
Maintenance system
(only for Type B cluster,
if equipped)
The Maintenance system informs the
driver when to replace engine oil and
rotate tires.
OUB041069
Maintenance
1. When the vehicle is at a standstill,
pressing the TRIP button for more than
2 seconds with the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ON position or
engine running, the LCD display on the
cluster will change to the "User
Setting" mode.
You can move to the items by pressing
the TRIP button and select the item by
pressing the RESET button.
2. In the "User Setting" mode select
"Maintenance".
4 53
Features of your vehicle
OUB042070
OUB042071
OUB041072
Maintenance schedule
1. Select the desired engine oil (tire rotation) maintenance schedule.
2. If finished, you can come out of the
Maintenance mode by pressing the
TRIP button for more than 2 seconds.
Engine Oil(Tire Rotation) Service
Required
1. If service is required, the message will
be displayed.
2. If you would like to reset or inactivate
the maintenance system press the
RESET button for more than 1 second.
The display will change to "Engine Oil
Service Message" mode.
You can move to items by pressing the
TRIP button and select the desired
item by pressing the RESET button.
4 54
Features of your vehicle
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
warning lights are still on, this indicates a
situation that needs attention. When
releasing the parking brake, the brake
system warning light should go off. The
fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel
level is low.
Air bag warning light
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
This light also comes on when the
Supplement Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the air bag warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
This warning light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the system is
operating normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that the ABS may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible. The normal braking system will
still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.
4 55
Features of your vehicle
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If these two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving, your vehicle’s ABS and EBD system may have
malfunctioned.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Seat belt warning
WARNING
- ABS/brake lights
If both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehicle’s brake system will not work
normally during sudden braking. In
this case, avoid high speed driving
and abrupt braking. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
If the ABS warning light or EBD warning
light is on and stays on, the speedometer
or odometer/tripmeter may not work. In
this case, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
4 56
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately 6
seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON, regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned on, the
seat belt warning light and the seat belt
warning chime will operate for approximately 6 seconds. But if the belts is refastened within the 6 seconds, the warning
chime will turn off and the warning light
will blink for the remainder of the 6 second
period.
If the driver's seat belt is disconnected
after the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the seat belt warning light will
blink for approximately 6 seconds. But if it
is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will turn off immediately. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph),
the seat belt warning light and chime will
operate approximately 11 times with a
pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds
off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle
speed decreases below 5 km/h (3 mph).
Features of your vehicle
Turn signal indicator
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
Engine oil pressure
warning light
The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
it indicates a malfunction in the turn signal system. You should consult your dealer for repairs.
This indicator also blinks when the hazard warning switch is turned on.
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights ON.
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized Kia dealer.
High beam indicator
Tail light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the tail
lights are on.
CAUTION - Engine damage
This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated and
stays on while the engine is running,
serious engine damage may result.
4 57
Features of your vehicle
The oil pressure warning light comes on
whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come
on when the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is started. If
the oil pressure warning light stays on
while the engine is running, there is a
serious malfunction.
4 58
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning light
Parking brake warning
This warning light illuminates for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and then it will go out.
Also, this light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the START or ON position. The
warning light should go out when the
parking brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any authorized Kia dealer for a brake system
inspection and necessary repairs.
Features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop in
as short a distance with only a portion of
the brake system working. If the brakes
fail while you are driving, shift to a lower
gear for additional engine braking and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Charging system warning
light
Trunk lid (or tailgate) open
warning light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
Kia dealer correct the problem as soon
as possible.
This warning light illuminates when the
trunk lid (or tailgate) is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.
4 59
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer indicator
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes
off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC or ON position, the indicator
will illuminate for a few minutes to indicate that you are able to start the
engine. However, when the smart key
is not in the vehicle, if the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pressed, the
indicator will blink for a few minutes to
indicate that you are not able to start
the engine.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP button changes to the ON position from
the ACC position without the smart key
in the vehicle, the indicator blinks for a
few minutes to indicate that you are not
able to start the engine.
4 60
• When the battery is weak, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed, the indicator will blink and you
are not able to start the engine.
However, you are able to start the
engine by inserting the smart key in
the smart key holder. If the smart key
system related parts have a problem,
the indicator will blink.
Low fuel level warning
light
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
Features of your vehicle
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this indicator illuminates while driving, it
indicates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emission control system.
This indicator will also illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, and will go off in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, take your vehicle to the nearest
authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized Kia dealer promptly.
CAUTION - MIL illumination
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission
Control
System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
• If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter
damage. This could result in loss
of engine power. Have the Engine
Control System inspected as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
ESC indicator (Electronic
Stability Control)
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions under normal driving conditions, the ESC light will remain
off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator will blink to
indicate the ESC is operating.
If the ESC indicator stays on, the ESC
may have a malfunction. Take your car to
an authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
ESC OFF indicator
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
4 61
Features of your vehicle
Low washer fluid level
warning indicator
Low tire pressure telltale
(if equipped)
WARNING - Low tire
pressure
This warning light indicates the washer
fluid reservoir is nearly empty. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
4 62
The low tire pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position.
If the warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after coming on
for about 3 seconds when you turned the
ignition key to the "ON" position, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is not working properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an Kia authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate if
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible. If
the warning light illuminates while driving, reduce vehicle speed immediately
and stop the vehicle.
Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting at
the steering wheel. Inflate the tires to the
proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on tires with low
pressure will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
Features of your vehicle
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
Cruise SET indicator
SET
CRUISE
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control ON/OFF button on the steering
wheel is pushed.
The indicator goes off when the cruise
control ON/OFF button is pushed again.
For more Information, refer to “Cruise
control system” in section 5.
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
function switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates when the cruise
control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.
The cruise SET indicator does not illuminate when the cruise control switch
(CANCEL) is pushed or the system is
disengaged.
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
Electric power steering
(EPS) system warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go off when the engine
starts.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has malfunctioned. If it comes on while
driving, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel cap open warning
indicator
This warning light indicates the fuel filler
cap is not tighten securely.
Always make sure that the fuel filler cap
is tight.
4 63
Features of your vehicle
ECOMINDER® indicator
(if equipped)
WARNING - ECOMINDER®
Auto stop indicator
(if equipped)
indicator
The ECOMINDER® indicator is displayed
to help you improve fuel efficiency when
you are driving.
• The ECOMINDER® indicator will turn
the ECO light green on the instrument
panel when you are driving efficiently
in the ECO ON mode.
If you don't want the indicator displayed, you can turn the ECO ON
mode to OFF mode by pressing the
TRIP button.
• When the instant fuel consumption
mode(if equipped) is displayed on the
LCD display or the system is not working properly, the indicator turns off. If
the indicator turns off when the instant
fuel consumption mode or ECO OFF
mode is not selected, have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
• Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's
driving habit and road condition.
• The system stops operating when the
transaxle is in the P (Park), R
(Reverse), N (Neutral) position or
sports mode, or when the instant fuel
consumption mode is selected.
4 64
Don't keep watching the “ECO”
ECOMINDER® indicator while driving. It may distract you while driving and cause an accident.
This indicator will illuminate when
engine enters the Idle Stop mode of
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.
When the automatic starting occurs,
auto stop indicator on the cluster
blink for 5 seconds.
the
the
the
will
For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle
Stop and Go) system in chapter 5.
✽ NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, ESC or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of the low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system is
malfunctioning.
Features of your vehicle
LCD display warning (if equipped)
• For vehicle’s equipped with smart key system
Key is not detected
Key is not in vehicle
Press start with smart key
OUB043073
OUB043074
OUB043075
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and
if any door is opened or closed with the
engine start/stop button in the ACC, ON,
or START position, the warning illuminates on the LCD display. Also, the chime
sounds for 5 seconds when the smart
key is not in the vehicle and the door is
closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is
not detected and you press the engine
start/stop button, the warning illuminates
on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also,
the immobilizer indicator blinks for 10
seconds.
If you press the engine start/stop button
while the warning “Key is not detected” is
illuminated, the warning “Press the start
button with smart key” illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
immobilizer indicator blinks for 10 seconds.
4 65
Features of your vehicle
• For vehicle’s equipped with smart key system
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for automatic transaxle)
Low key battery
OUB043076
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the OFF position when the smart key in
the vehicle discharges, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10
seconds. Also, the warning chime
sounds once.
Replace the battery with a new one.
4 66
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for manual transaxle)
OUB041077
OUB041078
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing the
brake pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
brake pedal to start the engine.
If the engine start/stop button turns to the
ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the
clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
clutch pedal to start the engine.
Features of your vehicle
• For vehicle’s equipped with smart key system
Shift to "P" position
(for automatic transaxle)
Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine
(for automatic transaxle)
Press start button again
OUB041080
OUB041079
If you try to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
engine start/stop button will turn to the
ACC position. If the button is pressed
once more it will turn to the ON position.
The warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that
you should press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position to turn off the engine.
Also, the warning chime sounds for about
10 seconds. (if equipped)
If you can not operate the engine
start/stop button when there is a problem
with the engine start/stop button system,
the warning illuminates for 10 seconds
and the chime sounds continuously to
indicate that you could start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
once more.
The chime will stop if the engine
start/stop button system works normally
or the theft alarm system is armed.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the engine start/stop button, take
your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer
and have the system checked.
OUB041081
If you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral)
position, the warning illuminates for
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but
for your safety start the engine with the
shift lever in the P(Park) position.
4 67
Features of your vehicle
Press start button while turn steering
Check steering wheel lock system
Check stop lamp fuse (if equipped)
OUB041082
OUB041084
OUB041085
If the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the engine start/stop button
is pressed, the warning illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
warning chime sounds once and the
engine start/stop button light blinks for 10
seconds.
When you are warned, press the engine
start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left.
If the steering wheel does not lock normally when the engine start/stop button
changes to the OFF position, the warning
illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD
display. Also, the warning chime sounds
for 3 seconds and the engine start/stop
button light blinks for 10 seconds.
When the stop lamp fuse is disconnected, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that
is not possible you can start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
for 10 seconds in ACC.
4 68
Features of your vehicle
Door open! (if equipped)
Low washer liquid (if equipped)
Fuel cap open warning (if equipped)
OUB041086
OUB041087
OUB041170
This warning light illuminates for 10 seconds when the washer fluid reservoir is
nearly empty. If you press the TRIP button
while the warning light is illuminating,
LCD display mode is changed to the trip
mode for 4 seconds and then will return to
the low washer liquid mode. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
It displays the corresponding door or tailgate that is not closed securely.
This warning light indicates the fuel filler
cap is not tight securely.
Always make sure that the fuel filler cap
is tight.
4 69
Features of your vehicle
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
Low tire pressure (if equipped)
OUB041088
OUB041089
OUB043210
If you start the engine when the steering
wheel is turned 90 degrees to the left
after a couple of seconds, “Align steering
wheel” illuminates on the LCD display for
5 seconds.
Turn the steering wheel to the right and
make it turned to the left less than 30
degrees.
If you start the engine when the steering
wheel is turned 90 degrees to the right
after a couple of seconds, “Align steering
wheel” illuminates on the LCD display for
5 seconds.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and
make it turned to the right less than 30
degrees.
This warning message will illuminate
when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
4 70
Features of your vehicle
REAR-CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
Always keep the camera lens clean. If
lens is covered with foreign matter, the
camera may not operate normally.
WARNING - Rear Camera
Display
OUB045092N
The rear view camera is not a safety device. It only serves to assist
the driver in identifying objects
directly behind the middle of the
vehicle, nor is it a substitute for
proper and safe backing-up procedures. The camera does NOT cover
the complete area behind the vehicle. Objects can be much closer
than they appear in the display
screen and can be distorted in both
size and proportion. The RearCamera Display may not display
every object behind the vehicle.
WARNING - Backing &
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear view
camera when backing. You must
always use methods of viewing the
area behind you including looking
over both shoulders as well as continuously checking all three rear
view mirrors. Due to the difficulty of
ensuring that the area behind you
remains clear, always back slowly
and stop immediately if you even
suspect that a person, and especially a child, might be behind you.
OUB041093
The Rear-Camera Display will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
ignition switch ON and the shift lever in
the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that displays a veiw from behind the vehicle through the UVO audio or navigation
display while backing-up.
4 71
Features of your vehicle
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OUB045094N
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. Both
turn signal lights will blink. The hazard
warning lights will operate even though
the key is not in the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch again.
4 72
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
Daytime running light
• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
turn off automatically if the driver parks
on the side of the road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) may help
make it easier for others to see the front
of your vehicle during the day. DRL can
be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after
dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The front fog light or headlight (low
beam) switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
3. The parking brake is applied.
OXM049110
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
4 73
Features of your vehicle
OAM049041
OAM049042
OFS040084
Parking light position (
)
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail, position, license and instrument panel lights
will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position) the head, tail,
position, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
turn ON or OFF automatically depending
on the amount of light outside the vehicle.
Never place anything over sensor (1)
located on the instrument panel. This will
ensure better auto-light system control.
Don’t clean the sensor using a window
cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film
which could interfere with sensor operation.
If your vehicle has window tint or other
types of metallic coating on the front
windshield, the Auto light system may not
work properly.
4 74
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.
OAM049044
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
OAM049043
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
4 75
Features of your vehicle
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or
slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a
poor electrical connection in the circuit.
OAM049045
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). The green arrow indicators on the
instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel
after a turn is completed. If the indicator
continues to flash after a turn, manually
return the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.
4 76
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly for less than 0.5 second and then
release it. The lane change signals will
blink 3 times.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
OAM049046N
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned
to the on position after the headlights are
turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
(1) to the off position.
When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical
power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Front
Rear (5 door, if equipped)
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· HI – High wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
· INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Automatic control wipe
· OFF – Off
· MIST – Single wipe
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
OAM049100L/OAM049048N
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
4 77
Features of your vehicle
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to off position when the wiper is not in use.
Always remove all snow and ice and
defrost the windshield properly prior to
operating the windshield wipers.
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, move the
lever upward and release it. The
wipers will operate continuously if
the lever is held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the
same wiping intervals. Use this
mode in a light rain or mist. To vary
the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
If there is heavy accumulation of snow or
ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the
snow and/or ice is removed before using
the windshield wipers to ensure proper
operation.
4 78
Rain sensor
OXM049123
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates. When
the rain stops, the wiper stops.
✽ NOTICE - Sensor cover
Do not remove the sensor cover located
on the upper end of the passenger side
windshield glass as this may damage the
sensor system.
✽ NOTICE - Winter driving
Always set the auto wiper switch to the
off position in the winter to avoid auto
activation during icy conditions which
may damage the windshield wipers.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Wiper position
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the off position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the
washer does not work, check the washer
fluid level.
If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will
need to add appropriate non-abrasive
windshield washer fluid to the washer
reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your
vision.
4 79
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Wipers &
windshields
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
OAM049103N
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (5 door)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
4 80
OXM049125
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever.
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
Do not use the interior lights for extended
periods when the engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING - Interior light
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. The glare from
the interior lights may obstruct
your view and cause an accident.
OAM049052
OUB041098
Map lamp (if equipped)
Room lamp
1. Push the lens to turn the light on or off.
2. DOOR : The light comes on or goes
off when a door is opened or
closed.
3. OFF (Door switch is not pressed) :
The light stays off at all times even when
a door is opened.
When the light is turned on with the lens
pressed, the light is not turned off even
with the switch in the OFF position.
1. ON : The light stays on at all times.
2. DOOR : The light comes on or off
when a door is opened or
closed.
3. OFF : The light stays off at all times
even when a door is opened.
Do not leave the switch in the ON position for an extended period of time when
the vehicle is not running.
4 81
Features of your vehicle
■ 4 door
ORBC040059
■ 5 door
OLM049105
OUB041099
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the trunk (tailgate) is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk (tailgate) securely
after using the luggage room.
4 82
OUB041100
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Glove box lamp
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this button
is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this button
is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off position
when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use.
If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp
off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor.
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging system
drain, close the glove box securely after
using the glove box.
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
If you want to defrost and defog the front
windshield,
refer
to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this section.
OUB045101
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster manually, press
the rear window defroster button again.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
4 83
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Recirculated air position button
7. Outside fresh air position button
OUB045103L
4 84
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heating
and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air or recirculated air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system (if equipped)
on.
OUB045104N
4 85
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)
OUB041105
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Six symbols
are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
4 86
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Features of your vehicle
OUB045106L
OUB041107
OUB045108L
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivered from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to
the right for warm air or left for cooler air.
4 87
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
passenger compartment
will be drawn through the
heating system and heated
or cooled according to the
function selected.
OUB045109
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
4 88
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will not illuminate
when the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position
selected, air
enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and the
air within the passenger compartment
may become stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position as much
as possible while driving.
WARNING - Reduced visibility
Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
OUB045110
OUB045208L
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the “0” position.
4 89
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
OUB045111
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
4 90
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
,
position.
Operation Tips
• To prevent dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system, temporarily set the
air intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with
environmentally
friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. However, prolonged
operation of the reticulated air position
will excessively dry the air. In this case,
change the air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, set the mode control to
the MAX A/C position, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
CAUTION - Excessive AC
While using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up hills
or in heavy traffic when outside
temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may
cause engine overheating and
potential engine damage. Continue
to use the blower fan but turn the
air conditioning system off if the
temperature
gauge
indicates
engine overheating.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
4 91
Features of your vehicle
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
✽ NOTICE
Outside air
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air filter
inspections and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia dealer.
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Heater core
Evaporator core
OMG075033
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
4 92
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - AC Repair
The oil and refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
under very high pressure. If proper
service procedures are not followed
an explosion may result. To reduce
the risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in your
vehicle should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
CAUTION - AC Repair
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used, otherwise damage to the
vehicle may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.
The air conditioning system should be
serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
4 93
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Climate control display
4. Fan speed control knob
5. OFF button
6. Front windshield defroster button
7. Rear window defroster button
8. Mode selection button
9. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
10. Air intake control button
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to discharge. It is best to operate the
blower when the engine is running.
OUB045120N
4 94
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
OUB045121
Automatic heating and air conditioning
1. Push the AUTO button. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically
according to the temperature setting.
OUB045126
2. Set the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button or switch of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 23°C (73°F).
4 95
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
OUN026312
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
4 96
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this case,
the system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons selected.
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except the AUTO button while
using automatic operation, the functions
not selected will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heating
and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.
Features of your vehicle
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Face-Level (B, D)
OUB045123
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual climate control system”.
4 97
Features of your vehicle
OUB045106L
OUB041107
OUB045126
Defrost mode
When you select the defrost mode, the
following system settings will be made
automatically:
• The air conditioning system will be
turned on.
• The outside(fresh) air position will be
selected.
• The fan speed will be set to the high
speed.
To turn the defrost mode off, press the
mode button or defrost button again or
AUTO button.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet port can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it downward to the maximum position. To open
the vent, rotate it upward to the desired
position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivered from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the
right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the
left extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.
When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
4 98
Features of your vehicle
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade and Fahrenheit as
follows:
While pressing the OFF button, press the
AUTO button for 4 seconds or more.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compartment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
OUB045127
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position
selected,
air
enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
4 99
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging
of the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on as this may cause serious harm
or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
WARNING - Recirculated
air
WARNING - Reduced visibility
Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
4 100
Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position as much
as possible while driving.
OUB045130
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by operating the fan speed control
knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
OUB045131
OUB045132
Air conditioning (A/C)
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However, you can
still operate the air intake buttons as long
as the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or
position.
4 101
Features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
4 102
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with environmentally friendly R-134a
refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, then set the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
CAUTION
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge
indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive
water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air
conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehicle
by operating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of
the windshield could cause the outer
surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this case,
set the mode selection knob or button
to the
position and fan speed control to the lower speed.
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower Evaporator core
Climate control air filter
Heater core
OHM048209
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehicle
from the outside through the heating and
air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents
may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield
even when the outside (fresh) air position
is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
4 103
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
4 104
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing
the service.
✽ NOTICE
It is important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, damage to the compressor
and abnormal system operation may
occur.
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of
the outside air and the windshield
could cause the outer surface of
the windshield to fog up, causing
loss of visibility. In this case, set
the mode selection knob or button
to the
position and fan speed
control knob or button to a lower
speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up
the inside of the windshield.
OUB045133
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0” position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is not
selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
4 105
Features of your vehicle
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the
position is selected,
lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher
fan speed.
OUB045134
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically.
4 106
OUB045135
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
Features of your vehicle
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging up
inside of the windshield, the air intake or
air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such
as
or
position. To cancel or
return to the defogging logic, do the followings.
OUB045136
OUB041137
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
If the
position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the
defrost position (
).
3. Push the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
4 107
Features of your vehicle
The A/C display blinks 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled
or returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it is reset to the defog logic
status.
OUB045138
OVF041170
Automatic climate control system
(if equipped)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select the defrost position pressing
defrost button (
).
3. While holding the air conditioning button (A/C) pressed, press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3
seconds.
Auto defogging system
(Only for automatic climate control
system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of
fogging up the inside of the windshield by
automatically sensing the moisture of
inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the AUTO mode is on.
4 108
Features of your vehicle
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windshield and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher
steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the windshield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically activated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds
while pressing the AUTO button. The
indicator will blink 3 times to notify you
that the system is cancelled. To use the
auto defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defogging status.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
✽ NOTICE
If the A/C off is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the auto
defogging indicator will blink 3 times to
give notice that the A/C off can not be
selected.
4 109
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.
Always keep the storage compartment
covers closed while driving. Do not
attempt to place so many items in the
storage compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
■ Type A
OUB041140
WARNING - Flammable
■ Type B
OUB041142
materials
Glove box
Do not store, propane cylinders, or
other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
Always keep the glove box closed while
the vehicle is in operation.
OUB041155
Center console storage
(if equipped)
To open the center console storage, pull
up the lever.
4 110
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
■ 4 door
Do not put perishable food in the cool
box because it may not maintain the
necessary consistent temperature to
keep the food fresh.
✽ NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in the
warm or hot position, warm or hot air
will flow into the glove box.
OUB041206K
OUB041143K
■ 5 door
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever of the vent
installed in the glove box to the open
position.
3. When the cool box is not used, slide
the lever to the closed position.
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the
coolbox is reduced.
OUB041147
Luggage net holder
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the 4 holders located
in the cargo area to attach the luggage
net.
4 111
Features of your vehicle
If necessary, contact your authorized Kia
dealer to obtain a luggage net.
To prevent damage to the goods or the
vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.
WARNING - Luggage net
Always keep your face and body
out of the luggage net recoil path
and avoid using the luggage net
when the straps have visible signs
of wear or damage. The luggage net
can snap and cause injuries.
OUB041148
Luggage tray (5 door)
(if equipped)
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy
access.
1. Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
2. Fold the rear part of luggage tray
board frontward.
3. Lift up luggage tray board frontward
(Luggage tray board stand itself)
4 112
Features of your vehicle
OUB041148
OUB041151
OUB041150
OUB041178
OUB041149
Increase cargo space (if equipped)
If you want to increase cargo space,
1. Grasp the handle on the top of the cover and lift it
2. Fold the rear part of the luggage tray board frontward
3. Lift the luggage tray board hinge and pull it to the end of sliding slot.
4. Rotate it downward and slide it frontward (refer to the above pictures)
4 113
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
• Do not hold the lighter in after it is
already heated because it will overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out within 30
seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.
CAUTION - Cigarette
lighter
OUB041152
Do not insert accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket. Doing so
can damage the lighter socket
OUB041153
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Ashtray (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element is
heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine Kia replacement or its approved equivalent.
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
4 114
WARNING - Ashtray use
Putting lit cigarettes or matches in
an ashtray with other combustible
materials may cause a fire.
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups of hot
liquid in the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid
spills, you may burn yourself. Such
a burn to the driver could lead to
loss of control of the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
■ Type A
When cleaning spilled liquids, do not
dry the cup holder at high temperature.
This may damage the cup holder.
OUB041154
CAUTION
■ Type B
Do not place uncovered cups in the
cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion. If the liquid spills, electric
systems may malfunction.
OUB041179
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
4 115
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket.
OUB041156
OUB041172
■ Type B
lamp
If you use the vanity mirror lamp,
turn off the lamp before return the
sunvisor to its original position. It
could result in battery discharge
and possible sunvisor damage.
Sliding armrest (if equipped)
To move forward
Grab the front portion of the armrest (1)
then pull it forward
To move rearward
Push the armrest rearward with your
palm.
OVG049174
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
4 116
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
Features of your vehicle
Only use 12V electric accessories which
are less than 10A in electric capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the
lowest operating level when using the
power outlet.
Close the cover when not in use.
Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a
vehicle’s power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic systems
or devices used in your vehicle.
OUB045159L
OUB041157
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory
plug for prolonged periods of time with
the engine off could cause the battery to
discharge.
WARNING - Electric shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
Shopping bag holder
• Do not hang a bag weighing more than
3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause damage to
the shopping bag holder.
• Do not hang the frail objects when you
drive rough road, the objects may be
damaged.
4 117
Features of your vehicle
Digital clock and calendar
(if equipped)
WARNING - Clock Setting
Distraction
Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the clock and the calendar.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
Do not adjust the clock while driving. Such adjustments may distract
you for too long from the roadway
and lead to a collision.
OUB045161N
Setup the clock and calender
With audio off
1. Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button (1)
until the clock of the display blinks.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob (2)
and press it.
With audio on
1. Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button (1)
until the clock adjust mode displayed.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob(2)
and press it.
4 118
Features of your vehicle
For driver’s side
For passenger’s side
WARNING
Do not hang other objects such as
hangers or hard objects except
clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp
or breakable objects in the clothe
pockets. In an accident or when the
curtain air bag is inflated, it may
cause vehicle damage or personal
injury.
OUN026348
OTFNCO2001
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
Floor mat anchor(s)
To use the hanger, pull down the upper
portion of hanger.
When using a floor mat on the floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat
anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward.
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of being
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchors. Unsecured floor
mats can interfere with pedal operation.
4 119
Features of your vehicle
The following must be observed when
installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat
anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot
be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor
mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of one
another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on
top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in
each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat
anchors that are designed to securely
hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation, Kia
recommends that only the Kia floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle be
installed.
4 120
OUB041182N
Navigation system (if equipped)
The navigation system ascertains the
present position of your vehicle by using
information from satellites and guides
you to the place you assign as the destination.
Detailed information for the navigation
system is described in a separately supplied manual.
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
If you install an aftermarket HID head
lamp, your vehicle’s audio and electronic
device may malfunction.
CAUTION - Antenna
Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counter-clockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.
OHM048154N
Antenna
When reinstalling your antenna, it is
important that it is fully tightened and
adjusted to the upright position to ensure
proper reception. But it could be removed
when parking the vehicle.
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna can be removed. To
remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
4 121
Features of your vehicle
OUB041163
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio control button
is installed to improve convenience.
Do not operate the audio remote control
buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (+/-) (1)
• Push the lever up to increase volume.
• Push the lever down to decrease volume.
4 122
MODE (3)
Press the button to select Radio or CD
(compact disc).
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in
each mode.
MUTE (4)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
SEEK/PRESET (
/
) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different
functions base on the system mode. For
the following functions the button should
be pressed for 0.8 second or more.
CDP/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
(if equipped)
CDP/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc.
You can use a compatible phone via
using
the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology. Detailed information for the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is
described in the Audio system section.
Features of your vehicle
However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and
clear. This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the
presence of buildings, bridges or other
large obstructions in the area.
FM reception
OUB041165
Aux, USB and
(if equipped)
iPod®
If your vehicle has an AUX and/or USB
(universal serial bus) port, you can use
an AUX port to connect audio devices
and an USB port to plug in an USB and
also plug in an iPod®.
iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. Connectivity may require use of
the Kia accessory cable.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
JBM001
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal
is then received by the radio and sent to
your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction.
4 123
Features of your vehicle
AM reception
FM radio station
JBM002
JBM003
JBM004
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that you
select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
4 124
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in receiving Sirius XM® Satellite Radio signals in
the following situations.
• If you are driving on a mountain road
where is the signal blocked by mountains.
JBM005
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
SATELITE2
SATELITE1
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks
the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the
signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft. / 10m
or more), for example on an road that
goes through a dense forest.
• The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the SIRIUS repeater network.
There may be other unforeseen circumstances leading to reception problems
with the SIRIUS satellite radio signal.
4 125
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio system. This does not mean that
something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate
mobile devices as far from the audio
equipment as possible.
When using a communication system
such as a cellular phone or a radio set
inside the vehicle, a separate external
antenna must be fitted. When a cellular
phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with
the vehicle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation of the
vehicle.
4 126
WARNING - Cell phone use
Do not use a cellular phone while
driving. Stop at a safe location to
use a cellular phone.
WARNING - Audio System
Do not disassemble, assemble, or
modify the audio system. Such acts
could result in fire or electric
shock.
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen while
driving. Staring at the screen for
prolonged periods of time could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents. Use
the phone feature after parking
the vehicle.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna during
thunder or lightening as such acts
may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be heard as
these signs may indicate product
malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
• Adjust the volume to levels that allow
the driver to hear sounds from outside
of the vehicle. Driving in a state where
external sounds cannot be heard may
lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sudden
output of extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to hearing
impairment. (Adjust the volume to a
suitable levels before turning off the
device.)
• Turn on the car ignition before using
the audio system. Do not operate the
audio system for long periods of time
with the ignition turned off; such operations may lead to battery discharge.
• In case of product malfunction, please
contact your place of purchase or After
Service center.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
CAUTION
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage to
the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device, make
sure to turn off the audio system
and use a dry and smooth cloth.
Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as such
materials may damage the device
panel or cause color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.
• Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil from
contacting
the
dashboard
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.
4 127
Features of your vehicle
USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device, make
sure the device is not connected when
starting up the vehicle. Connect the
device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the USB
device is connected, it may damage
the USB device. (USB flashdrives are
very sensitive to electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned off
while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not
work.
• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between 8Kbps ~
320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnecting the
external USB device.
(Continued)
4 128
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector setting
of External USB device is not either
512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the
device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in contact with the
human body or other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short period
of time, it may break the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB mode,
the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore,
disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio)
• Depending on the type and capacity of
the external USB device or the type of
the files stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time for recognition
the device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is not
supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause trouble.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB hub
purchased separately, the vehicle’s
audio system may not recognize the
USB device. In that case, connect the
USB device directly to the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical
drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car
audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/ Cellular
phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be
unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may not be
supported in some mobile devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to connection failures due to vehicle vibrations
are not supported. (i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be
unrecognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL
RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may be
lost while using this audio. Always back
up important data on a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB
memory products which
can be used as key chains
or cellular phone accessories as they could
cause damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug type
connector products.
4 129
Features of your vehicle
USING iPod® DEVICE
iPhone® is a registered trademark of
Apple inc.
• Some iPod® models may not support
communication protocol and files may
not play properly.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPhone® 3GS/4
- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod® classic
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod® is disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod®. (Reset:
Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally on
low battery.
(Continued)
4 130
(Continued)
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected through
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
capability (such as for stereo headBluetooth®
Wireless
phone
Technology ). The device can play, but
it will not be controlled by the audio
system.
• To use iPod® features within the audio
mode, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod® device.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteristics
of your iPod®/iPhone® device.
• If your iPhone® is connected to both
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
and USB, only iPod® mode will be supported during Bluetooth® Audio
Streaming. To use Bluetooth® Audio
Streaming, disconnect iPod® cable with
iPhone®.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod® with the iPod®
Power Cable, insert the connector to the
multimedia socket completely. If not
inserted completely, communications
between iPod® and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of
the iPod® and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the
quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod® when adjusting the
audio system’s volume, and turn off the
equalizer of the audio system when
using the equalizer of an iPod®.
• When not using iPod® with car audio,
detach the iPod® cable from iPod®.
Otherwise, iPod® may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
(if equipped)
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of such
marks by Kia is under license.
A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control that may
lead to an accident, severe personal
injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe
and legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices, other
equipment, or vehicle systems
which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe
operation of a vehicle or which are
not permissible by law should never
be used during operation of the
vehicle.
Before Using the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
What is Bluetooth® ?
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-distance
wireless networking technology which
uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz frequency to
connect various devices within a certain
distance.
• Supported within PCs, external devices,
Bluetooth® phones, PDAs, various electronic devices, and automotive environments, Bluetooth® allows data to be
transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a device
which allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth®
mobile phones through the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be supported in some mobile phones. To
learn more about mobile device comhttp://www.kia.
patibility,
visit
com/us/en/content/owners/
bluetooth.
4 131
Features of your vehicle
Precautions for Safe Driving
• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature that
enables drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the head unit with a
Bluetooth® phone allows the user to
conveniently make and receive calls
and use contacts. Before using
Bluetooth®, carefully read the contents
of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents.
Refrain from excessive operations while
driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead
to accidents. When driving, view the
screen only for short periods of time.
4 132
When connecting a Bluetooth®
Phone
• Before connecting the head unit with
the mobile phone, check to see that
the mobile phone supports Bluetooth®
features.
• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth®, the
phone will not be found during device
searches if the phone has been set to
hidden state or the Bluetooth® power is
turned off. Disable the hidden state or
turn on the Bluetooth® power prior to
searching/connecting with the Head unit.
• If you do not want an automatic connection with your Bluetooth® device,
turn off the Bluetooth® feature within
your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and quality
may differ depending on the mobile
phone.
• Park the vehicle when connecting the
head unit with the mobile phone.
• Bluetooth® connection may become
intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps to try
again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn the
Bluetooth® function off/on and try
again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power Off/On
and try again.
3. Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition (if equipped)
• When using the voice recognition feature, only commands listed within the
user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of
the voice recognition system, pressing
any key other than the
key terminate voice recognition mode.
• For optimal voice recognition performance, position your head below the
microphone above the driver’s seat
and maintain proper position when
speaking voice commands.
• Within the following situations, voice
recognition may not function properly
due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the blower AC/heater is set to
high
- When entering and passing through
tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains, windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can be
used only when a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a name,
the corresponding contact must be
downloaded and stored within the
audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the phone
book data into voice information.
During this time, voice recognition may
not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.
4 133
Features of your vehicle
Standard Audio System
■ Type A-1
(equipped with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology)
4 134
■ Type A-2
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
■ Type A-1
(2) RADIO
Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM
➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
❈ In Setup Display, the radio pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the
TUNE knob or keys 1
~ 6 to select the desired mode.
(3) MEDIA
Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio.
(1)
(EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
❈ In Setup Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the
desired mode.
(4) PHONE
Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
SEEK
(5) TRACK
Radio Mode : Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to next or previous song
(file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Rewinds or fast-forwards the
current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or previous song(file)
❈ The Play/Pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
(6)
POWER/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning the
knob left/right
4 135
Features of your vehicle
(7) DISP
Each time the button is shortly pressed
(under 0.8 seconds), it sets the screen
Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(8) SCAN
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
4 136
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Previews the broadcasts saved
in Preset 1 ~ 6
for 5 seconds
each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to continue listening to the current frequency.
❈ SAT Radio does not support the Preset
scan feature.
CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to continue listening to the current song (file).
(9) SETUP/CLOCK
Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,
Clock, Phone, System setting modes
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Move to the Time setting screen
(10) MENU
Displays menus for the current mode.
❈ iPod® List : Move to parent category
CAT
(11) FOLDER
Radio Mode
- SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search
(12)
TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode :
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right.
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
Moves focus in all selection menus and
selects menus.
Features of your vehicle
(13) 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
Radio Mode : Saves frequencies (channels) or receives saved frequencies
(channels)
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- 1 RPT : Repeat
- 2 RDM : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu
pop up screen, the number menu is
selected.
■ Type A-2
(14) SAT
Changes to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟
SAT3.
❈ In Setup Display, the media pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the
TUNE knob or keys 1
~ 6 to select the desired mode.
SEEK
(16) TRACK
Radio Mode : Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod® modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to next or previous song
(file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Rewinds or fast-forwards the
current song.
❈ The Play/Pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
(15) MEDIA
Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX
mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX.
4 137
Features of your vehicle
CD, USB mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to continue listening to the current song (file).
(17) SCAN
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Previews the broadcasts saved
in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5 seconds
each.
❈ Press the key again to continue listening to the current frequency.
❈ SAT Radio does not support the Preset
scan feature.
4 138
(18)
TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right.
CD, USB, iPod® mode : Searches songs
(files) by turning the knob left/right.
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song. Moves
focus in all selection menus and
selects menus.
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Display] through
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key
Select
menu
through
TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO or
MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or
‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4 139
Features of your vehicle
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Sound] through
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key Select
menu
through
TUNE knob
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the
speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
[Off/On] of
TUNE knob
Tone
Position
This menu allows you to set the Bass,
Middle, Treble.
This menu allows you to set the Fader,
Balance.
Select [Tone] Select menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob
left/right to set
Select [Position] Select menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound
tone.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values, pressing the
TUNE knob will restore the
parent menu.
• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values, pressing the
TUNE knob will restore the
parent menu.
4 140
Voice Recognition Volume
(if equipped)
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set volume of
TUNE knob
Features of your vehicle
CLOCK SETTINGS
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Clock] through
TUNE knob or 3
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Clock Settings
Time Format
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr
through
TUNE knob.
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set On
/ Off through
TUNE knob
On : Displays time/date on screen
Off : Turn off.
❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to
set the [hour] and press the tune knob
to set the [minute] and [AM/PM].
Calendar Settings
WARNING - Clock Setting
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Calendar Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
Distraction
Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to
make the settings and press the tune
knob to move to the next setting.
4 141
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Memory Information
(if equipped)
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key
Select
[System]
Select menu through
TUNE knob
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed
on the left side while the total system
memory is displayed on the right side.
Prompt Feedback (if equipped)
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal and
Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set through
TUNE knob
• On : This mode is for beginner users
and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users and
omits some information during voice
command operation. (When using
Expert mode, guidance instructions
can be heard through the [Help] or
[Menu] commands.
4 142
Language
This menu is used to set the display and
voice recognition language.
Select
[Language] Set
through
TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
Features of your vehicle
RADIO : FM, AM or SiriusXM
SEEK
Preset SEEK
Selecting through manual search
Press the 1 ~ 6 key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Plays the frequency saved in
the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Pressing and holding the
1
6
desired key from
~
will
save the currently playing broadcast to
the selected key and sound a BEEP.
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to adjust
the frequency.
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store (Auto
Store) and Info functions.
SEEK
Press the TRACK key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Automatically searches for
the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : While holding the key, frequency changes without stopping.
When the key is released, automatically searches for the next frequency from
that point.
SCAN
Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5 seconds each.
A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through
TUNE knob or 1 RPT key.
Saves broadcasts with superior reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no frequencies are received, then the most recently
received frequency will be broadcast.
4 143
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3month trial subscription to the Sirius
Select package. You’ll get over 140 channels, including commercial-free music,
plus all your favorite sports, exclusive
talk, entertainment, and a selection of
premium programming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM
channels, visit siriusxm.com in the
United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or
call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite
radio antenna located on the roof of your
vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the
best location for an unobstructed, open
view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are
several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance :
• Antenna obstructions : For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up
and keep luggage and other material
as far away from the antenna as possible.
4 144
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings,
bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses,
parking garages, dense tree foliage
and thunderstorms can interfere with
your reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite
radio service that broadcasts music,
sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are
available for installation in motor vehicles
or factory installed, as well as for the
home, portable and wireless devices,
and through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system
include :
• Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the
date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet using
any computer connected to the
Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package,
by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide
to continue service after your trial, the
subscription plan you choose will
automatically renew thereafter and
you will be charged according to your
chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA,
DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm. ca. All fees and programming
subject to change. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM RADIO
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3month trial subscription to SiriusXM so
you have access to over 140 channels of
music, information, and entertainment
programming.
Please note that the vehicle will need to
be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an
unobstructed view of the sky in order for
the radio to receive the activation signal.
SEEK
SEEK
TRACK
Press the RADIO key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Continuously move to previous or next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will need
to contact SiriusXM Customer Care at 1800-643-2112. Have your 12-digit RID
(Radio Identification Number) / ESN
(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To
retrieve the RID / ESN, turn on the radio,
press the RADIO key, and tune to channel zero.
SCAN
Press the RADIO key SCAN
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each
❈ Press the SCAN key again to continue listening to the current frequency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the current category.
Category
CAT
FOLDER
Press the
key Set through
the
TUNE knob
• The display will indicate the category
menus, highlight the category that the
current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press the
CAT
key to navigate category
FOLDER
list.
• Press the tune knob to select the lowest channel in the highlighted category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
4 145
Features of your vehicle
Preset
Tune
1 ~ 6
Press the RADIO key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Plays the frequency saved
in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Pressing and holding the
1
6
desired key from
~
will
save the current broadcast to the
selected key and sound a BEEP.
• Rotate
TUNE knob : Changes the
channel number or scrolls category
list.
• Press
TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
✽ NOTICE - Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or
unplugged. Please consult with your
Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it means
that the antenna is covered and that
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio signal is
not available. Ensure the antenna is
uncovered and has a clear view of the
sky.
4 146
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the MENU key
Select [ Info] through the
TUNE knob
or 1 RPT key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the current song.
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod® / My Music
Press the MEDIA key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on the
screen.
Repeat
<USB>
While song (file) is playing 1 RPT (RPT)
key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode : RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (press the key) :
Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode : FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice) :
repeats all files within the current folder.
❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn off
repeat.
<My Music>
<Audio CD>
Random
❈ The CD is automatically played when a
CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically played
when a USB is connected.
While song (file) is playing
key
2 RDM (RDM)
Audio CD, My Music mode : RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
<MP3 CD>
4 147
Features of your vehicle
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
While song (file) is playing
key
• Folder Random (press the key) : Plays
all files within the current folder in random order.
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds) : Fast forwards the
song.
iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice) : Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn
off random.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
SEEK
TRACK
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
SEEK
TRACK
❈ If the
key is pressed again
within 2 seconds, the previous song is
played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds) : Rewinds the song.
4 148
SEEK
TRACK
Scan
While song (file) is playing
SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in iPod® mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
CAT
FOLDER
While file is playing
Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
CAT
FOLDER
While file is playing
Down) key
(Folder
(Folder
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the
TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod® mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning
TUNE knob : Searches for
songs (files)
• Pressing
TUNE knob : Plays selected song (file).
Features of your vehicle
MENU : Audio CD
Information
Folder Random
Press the Audio CD mode MENU key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
features.
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or 3 key to
display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off info
display.
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM key
to randomly play songs within the current
folder.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Folder Repeat
Press the MP3 CD / USB mode MENU
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT]
through the TUNE knob or 3 key to
repeat songs within the current folder.
Repeat
key to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random, Information,
and Copy features.
Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM]
TUNE knob or 4 key to
through the
randomly play all songs within the CD /
USB.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Random
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT key
to repeat the current song.
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM key to
randomly play songs within the current
CD.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to
repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
4 149
Features of your vehicle
Information
MENU
Press the
key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 5 key
to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off info
display.
MENU : iPod®
Information
In iPod® mode, press the MENU key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
TUNE knob or 3 key.
through the
Displays information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off info
display.
Copy (if equipped)
Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE knob or 6
key.
This is used to copy the current song into
My Music. You can play the copied Music
in My Music mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while copying
is in progress, a pop up asking you
whether to cancel copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX) while
copying is in progress, copying is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while copying
is in progress.
4 150
Search
Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
TUNE knob or 4 key.
through the
Displays iPod® category list.
❈ Searching iPod® category is MENU
key pressed, move to parent category.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT key to
repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM key.
Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Features of your vehicle
MENU : My Music Mode
Information
Delete All
In My Music mode, press the MENU key
to set the Repeat, Random, Information,
Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection
features.
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
TUNE knob or 3 key.
through the
Displays information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off info
display.
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the
TUNE knob or 5 key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the
TUNE knob or 6 key.
Songs within My Music are selected and
deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the
TUNE knob or 4 key.
Deletes currently playing file.
In the play screen, pressing delete will
delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list.
Delete Selection
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
➀ Select the file you wish to delete by
using the
TUNE knob.
➁ Press the MENU key and select the
delete menu to delete the selected file.
4 151
Features of your vehicle
➁ After selecting, press MENU key and
select the delete menu.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA currently connected with the AUX terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start when
an external device is connected with the
AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected, you
can also press the MEDIA key to change
to AUX mode.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a maximum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless
there is an external device connected
to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX
terminal for use.
4 152
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
AUDIO
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows
devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices,
stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
website at www.Bluetooth.com
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio
may not be supported depending on the
compatibility of your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first pair
and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
Features of your vehicle
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Kia is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control that may
lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe
and legal operation of a vehicle,
and use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes,
attention and focus away from the
safe operation of a vehicle or which
are not permissible by law should
never be used during operation of
the vehicle.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio
can be used only when the [Audio
Streaming] of Phone is turned On .
Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the MEDIA key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX ➟
My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the
TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The title / artist info may not be supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no title / no
artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
SEEK
Press TRACK
to play previous or next
song.
❈ The previous song / next song / play /
pause functions may not be supported in
some mobile phones.
4 153
Features of your vehicle
PHONE
Making a call using the Steeringwheel mount controls
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone, you must first pair
and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to enter
Phone mode. Once a phone is paired
or connected, the guidance screen will
be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if you
are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone will be automatically
connected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone connection, set the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology power to OFF.
4 154
(1) VOLUME key/scroll wheel :Raises or lowers speaker volume.
(2)
key : Places and transfers calls.
(3)
key : Ends calls or cancels functions.
(4) MUTEkey :Mutes the microphone during a call.
(5)
key : Activates voice recognition.
❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
• Check call history and making calls
- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote controller.
- The call history list will be displayed
on the screen.
- Press the
key again to connect a
call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called number
- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote controller.
- The most recently called number is
redialed.
❈ If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature
may not be supported in some mobile
phones)
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchroWireless
nizing your Bluetooth®
Technology phone or device with the car
audio system for connection. Pairing is
necessary to connect and use the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Kia is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control that may
lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe
and legal operation of a vehicle,
and use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes,
attention and focus away from the
safe operation of a vehicle or which
are not permissible by law should
never be used during operation of
the vehicle.
Pairing PHONE key /
key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the PHONE key or the
key
on the steering remote controller. The
following screen is displayed.
4 155
Features of your vehicle
2. Select [OK] button to enter the Pair
Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered.
Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to pair
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
4 156
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Hear, check
the passkey on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.
Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android TM and
Blackberry® phones) may offer an option
to
allow
acceptance
of
all future Bluetooth connection requests
by default." and "Visit http://www.kia.
com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth for
additional information on pairing your
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to
view a phone compatibility list.
• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the
key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a
new device or select [Connect] to connect
a previously paired device.
Features of your vehicle
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
TUNE knob
Select
Select
1. The following steps are the same as
those described in the section "When
No Devices have been Paired" on the
previous page.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle are
as follows. Some features may not be
supported depending on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC
on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth® device can be
connected at a time.
• Only
one
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
is connected.
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio related
features are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are possible only within devices that support
Handsfree or audio features, such as a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile
phone or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication
error,
corresponding
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due to
communication errors between the car
Handsfree and the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device, reset the device by
turning off and back on again. Upon
Bluetooth®
Wireless
resetting
Technology device, the system will be
restored.
4 157
Features of your vehicle
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your
mobile phone accepts the connection.
Refer to your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding phone
pairing and connections.
Connecting a Device
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
Select
1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired
but not connected
4 158
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and select
[Connect].
Features of your vehicle
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology devices with the car
audio system. The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority
of paired phones.
From the paired phone list, select the
phone you want to switch to the highest
priority, then select [Change Priority] button from the Menu. The selected device
will be changed to the highest priority.
• Priority icon will be displayed when the
selected phone is set as a priority
phone.
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
4 159
Features of your vehicle
Disconnecting a Device
Deleting a Device
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and select
[Disconnect] button.
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
4 160
• When deleting the currently connected
device, the device will automatically be
disconnected to proceed with the
deleting process.
Wireless
• If a paired Bluetooth®
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts data
will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Features of your vehicle
USING Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the PHONE
key to display the Phone menu screen.
1) Fav : Up to 20 frequently used contacts can be saved for easy access.
2) History : Displays the call history list
screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list
screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.
• If you select the [History] button but
there is no call history data, a prompt is
displayed which asks to download call
history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button but
there is no contacts data stored, a
prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to
your mobile phone user’s manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected
will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press
key on the
steering wheel while the call is incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
4 161
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode
features are disabled. Only the call
volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]
Call History
PHONE
key
Select
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects call
upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts
can be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be
automatically updated if the contact
has been updated in the phone. To
update Favorites, delete the Favorite
and create a new Favorite.
4 162
Press the PHONE key
History]
Select [Call
A list of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the call
history list in some mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID will
not be saved in the call history list.
• Calling through the call history is not possible when there is no call history stored
or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed
calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not stored in Call
History.
Features of your vehicle
Contacts
Press
the
[Contacts]
PHONE
key Select
The list of saved phone book entries is
displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the MENU key.
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the car
contacts. Contacts that have been
downloaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device (max 5
devices x 1,000 contacts each).
Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts and call
history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the icon
will be displayed within the status bar.
• It is not possible to begin downloading a
contact list when the contact download
feature has been turned off within the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
In addition, some devices may require
device authorization upon attempting to
download contacts. If downloading does
not normally occur, check the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may not
be supported in some mobile phones. For
more
information
of
supported
Bluetooth® devices and function support, refer to your phone's user's manual.
4 163
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Kia is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control that may
lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe
and legal operation of a vehicle,
and use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes,
attention and focus away from the
safe operation of a vehicle or which
are not permissible by law should
never be used during operation of
the vehicle.
4 164
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices
can be paired with the audio system.
For more information, refer to the “Pairing
through Phone Setup” section within
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with the
audio system. Upon selecting a paired
phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the “Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
Connection” section within Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
Features of your vehicle
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/
disconnects currently selected phone
2) Priority : Sets currently selected
phone to highest connection priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected
phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous screen
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone
user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
Outgoing Volume
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
Use
TUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.
• Upon downloading phone contacts, the
previous corresponding data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being downloaded.
• While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the TRACK
key.
4 165
Features of your vehicle
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the SETUP/CLOCK key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is
Bluetooth®
Wireless
turned
off,
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
back on, go to SETUP/CLOCK
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
4 166
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the steering wheel. Say a command.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Use full names vs. short or singlesyllable names (“John Smith” vs. “Dad”,
“Smith Residence” vs. “Home”)
2) Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
3) Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
4) Spell words completely, no abbreviations (“Doctor Goodman” vs. “Dr.
Goodman”)
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated
Shortly press the
key on the steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the
key on the steering remote controller
The command wait state is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the
system will say “Please say a command
after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode,
then the system will only say “(BEEP)”
• To
change
Prompt
Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to SETUP/CLOCK
[System] [Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
4 167
Features of your vehicle
ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the
key on the steering remote controller
The Kia Voice Recognition System may
have difficulty understanding some
accents or uncommon names. When
using Voice Recognition to place a call,
speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation.
To maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guidelines
when storing contacts :
• Use full names vs. short or single syllable names (“John Smith” vs. “Dad”,
“Smith Residence” vs. “Home”)
• Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• Spell words completely, no abbreviations (“Doctor Goodman” vs. “Dr.
Goodman”)
• While using voice command, pressing
any steering wheel control or a different
key will end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a voice
command, say “cancel” or “end” to end
voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a voice
command, press and hold the
key
on the steering wheel to end voice command.
4 168
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds) :
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Beep~
More Help
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds) :
Please say a...
Shortly pressing the
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds) :
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Contacts
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Cancel
key (under 0.8 seconds):
(BEEP)
More Help
4 169
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
• Common Commands : These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call <Name>
Call <Name>
on Mobile
Call <Name>
in Office
Call <Name>
at Home
Call <Name>
on Other
Phone
Favorites
Call History
4 170
Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Displays the Favorite screen.
Displays the Call History screen.
Command
Contacts
Dial Number
Redial
Tutorial
Radio
FM1(FM One)
FM2(FM Two)
AM
Function
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Connects the last dialed call number.
Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth® connections
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟
SAT2➟SAT3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio, main
tains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
Displays the FM1 screen.
Displays the FM2 screen.
Displays the AM screen.
Features of your vehicle
Command
FM Preset 1~6
AM Preset 1~6
FM 87.5~107.9
AM 530~1710
SIRIUS (Satellite)
SIRIUS (Satellite)
1~3
SIRIUS Channel
0~223
Media
CD
USB
iPod®
Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
• When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains
the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
Command
Function
My Music
Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary)
Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Mute
Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.
Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Plays the music saved in the CD.
Plays USB music.
Plays iPod® music.
4 171
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio commands : Commands available during FM,
AM radio operation.
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
4 172
Function
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
• Satellite radio commands : Commands that can be used
while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Channel 0~223
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information
Function
Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.
Features of your vehicle
• Audio CD commands : Commands available during Audio
CD operation.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Track 1~30
Function
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.
Plays the desired track number.
• MP3 CD / USB commands : Commands available during
USB and MP3 CD operation.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Information
Next Folder
Previous Folder
Function
Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Plays the first file in the next folder.
Plays the first file in the previous folder.
4 173
Features of your vehicle
• iPod® Commands : Commands available during iPod® operation.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Function
Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeats the current song.
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.
• My Music Commands : Commands available during My
Music operation.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Delete
4 174
Function
Randomly plays all saved files.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands :
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation
Command Operation
Command
Play
Pause
Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pauses the current song.
Features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
• iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold separately.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Kia is under license.
• SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM
satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
• Android™ is a trademark of Google, Inc.
• BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited (RIM).
All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
4 175
Features of your vehicle
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
4 176
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-5
ENGINE START/STOP button / 5-7
Starting the engine / 5-10
Manual transaxle / 5-13
Automatic transaxle / 5-16
Brake system / 5-22
Cruise control system / 5-34
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system / 5-39
Active eco system / 5-43
Economical operation / 5-44
Driving your vehicle
Special driving conditions / 5-46
Winter driving / 5-50
Trailer towing / 5-52
Vehicle load limit / 5-53
Vehicle weight / 5-58
5
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system does
not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked
whenever the vehicle is raised to change
the oil or for any other purpose. If you
hear a change in the sound of the
exhaust or if you drive over something
that strikes the underneath side of the
car, have the exhaust system checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in a
enclosed area for a prolonged time.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless
gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
5 2
WARNING - Open tailgate
Do not drive with the tailgate open.
Poisonous exhaust gases can enter
the passenger compartment
If you must drive with the tailgate
open proceed as follows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan at
the highest speed.
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in
Section 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsibility
is in the safe and legal operation of
the vehicle. Use of any handled
devices, other equipment or vehicle
systems that distract the drive
should not be used during vehicle
operation.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.
WARNING
- Check surrounding
Always check the surrounding areas
near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
5 3
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Even a small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment. Driving while under
the influence of drugs is as dangerous as or more dangerous than
driving drunk.
WARNING - Loose object
Securely store items in your vehicle. When you make a sudden stop
or turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the floor
and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
5 4
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop the
vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator
pedal for a long period of time. It
may overheat the engine or exhaust
system and cause fire.
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS
ACC (Accessory)
The electrical accessories are operative.
ON
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started. This is the normal
running position after the engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
OUB051001
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is
not in the ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch is
turned on. It will also go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
OTD059016
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The ignition key can be removed only in
the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
Before leaving the driver’s seat, always
make sure the shift lever is engaged in
1st gear for the manual transaxle or P
(Park) for automatic transaxle, set the
parking brake fully and shut the engine
off.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The engine
will crank until you release the key; then
it returns to the ON position. The brake
warning light can be checked in this position.
5 5
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Ignition switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
WARNING - Steering wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this
area could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
5 6
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
White
OUB055004K
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP
button
Whenever the front door is opened, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will illuminate for your convenience. The light will
go off after about 30 seconds when the
door is closed.
To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the ENGINE START/STOP button
with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will not
change to the OFF position but to the
ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the
engine off and to the ACC position by
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times
successively within 3 seconds. If the
vehicle is still moving, you can restart the
engine without depressing the brake
pedal by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position.
5 7
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
ON
Orange
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The electrical accessories are operational.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC position for more than 1 hour,
the button is turned off automatically to
prevent battery discharge.
5 8
START/RUN
Blue
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the ENGINE START/STOP button in the
ON position for a long time. The battery
may discharge, because the engine is
not running.
Not illuminated
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the shift lever in the P
(Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For
your safety, start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button without depressing the brake
pedal, the engine will not start and the
button will change as follow:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF
Driving your vehicle
If you leave the ENGINE START/ STOP
button in the ACC or ON position for a
long time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
5 9
Driving your vehicle
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, sandals, etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the brake
and accelerator pedal.
5 10
Starting the engine with an ignition key (if equipped)
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
It should be started without depressing the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)
If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in
motion, do not attempt to move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may put the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START position
in an attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
Driving your vehicle
OUB055069
Starting the engine with a smart
key (if equipped)
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park).
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while depressing the brake pedal.
It should be started without depressing the accelerator.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position or above, if
any door is opened, the system checks
for the smart key. If the smart key is not
KEY
in the vehicle,the “ OUT
” indi” or “
cator will blink or the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will illuminate on the LCD
display. And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds. The
indicator or warning will turn off while
the vehicle is moving. Always have the
smart key with you.
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar with
the vehicle operation. Pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button while
the smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine activation and/or unintended vehicle
movement.
5 11
Driving your vehicle
Do not press the ENGINE START/ STOP
button for more than 10 seconds except
when the stop lamp fuse is blown.
OUB055108
✽ NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 seconds
while it is in the ACC position. The
engine can start without depressing
the brake pedal. But for your safety
always depress the brake pedal before
starting the engine.
5 12
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
The shift lever can be moved withoutpressing the button.
The button (1) should be pressed when
moving the shift lever into reverse.
OUB051013
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.
Depress the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal.
The shift lever must be returned to the
neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The button (1) located below
the shift knob must be pulled upward
while moving the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
CAUTION - Downshifting
Do not downshift more than 2 gears
or downshift the gear when the
engine is running at high speed
(5,000 RPM or higher). Such a
downshifting may damage the
engine, clutch and the transaxle.
5 13
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant is
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
leave the shift lever at neutral position
and release the clutch. Depress the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, do not use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
If you don't press the clutch pedal
fully, the clutch may be damaged
or noise may occur.
5 14
WARNING - Incline parking
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then make
sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st
gear when the vehicle is parked on
a level or uphill grade, and shifted
into R (Reverse) on a downhill
grade. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
these precautions are not followed
in the order identified.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be depressed all the
way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal should
always be fully released while driving. Do
not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the
clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.
This causes unnecessary wear. Use the
foot brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the
clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you need to increase your speed
again. When the vehicle is traveling down
steep hills, downshifting helps maintain
safe speed and prolongs brake life.
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, shift to a lower gear. When
you do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse). The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured or killed
than a properly belted occupant.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or
turning. High speed cornering and turning increases the risk of vehicle rollover
due to loss of vehicle control. Rollover
accidents are extremely violent and
unpredictable.
5 15
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)BRAKE SYSTEM
Automatic transaxle operation
Shift lever
Button
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward
speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
✽ NOTICE
+ (UP)
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
- (DOWN)
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
Press the button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
OUB051014
5 16
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position; then set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Do not use the P position in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever is
latched in the P position and set the
parking brake fully. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are not
followed.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your transaxle,
do not accelerate the engine in R
(Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on. The
transaxle may be damaged if you
shift into P (Park) while the vehicle
is in motion.
When stopped on an upgrade, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power. Use
the service brake or the parking brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator light in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is
in motion will cause the drive wheels to
lock which will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
5 17
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking the
Vehicle” explained in this section.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
+ (UP)
Sports
mode
- (DOWN)
OUB051060
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stopped or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
5 18
Driving your vehicle
Up (+)
: Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
• In sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever to
the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system
may not execute certain gearshifts
when the shift lever is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road, push
the shift lever forward into the +(up)
position. This causes the transaxle to
shift into the 2nd gear which is better
for smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
OUB052059
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the sport mode.
With the shift lever in the sports mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽ NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shifters
at the same time, you can’t shift the
gear.
5 19
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system (if equipped)
Shift-lock override (without smart key
system)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle out of P (Park)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R
(Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle.
5 20
Shift-lock override (with smart key system)
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into
the R (Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depressing
the brake, then do the following:
OUB053015
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock access hole (1).
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access hole
and press down on the screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
Driving your vehicle
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
5 21
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
CAUTION - Brake pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. This will create
abnormally high brake temperatures which can cause excessive
brake lining and pad wear.
WARNING - Parking brake
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of the
brakes when descending a long or
steep hill by shifting to a lower
gear. Continuous brake application
will cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may
also pull to one side when the brakes are
applied. Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been affected
in this way. To dry the brakes, apply them
lightly while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance returns to
normal.
5 22
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
Avoid applying the parking brake to
stop the vehicle while it is moving
except in an emergency situation.
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a highpitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You
may hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress the
brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
Always replace the front or rear brake
pads as pairs.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pedal
Do not continue to drive with worn
brake pads. Continuing to drive
with worn brake pads can damage
the braking system and result in
costly brake repairs.
Rear drum brakes (if equipped)
Your rear drum brakes do not have wear
indicators. Therefore, have the rear brake
linings inspected if you hear a rubbing
noise. Also have your rear brakes
inspected each time you change or
rotate your tires and when you have the
front brakes replaced.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
5 23
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive brake
pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.
OUB051016
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking
the vehicle on a grade, the shift lever
should be positioned in the appropriate
low gear for manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P (Park) position for automatic
transaxle vehicles.
5 24
OUB051017
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly, press the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while holding the button.
Driving your vehicle
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING - Parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have the
parking brake fully engaged when
parked to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can
injure occupants or pedestrians.
W-75
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will illuminate when the
parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released while
the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, stop driving the vehicle
immediately. If that is not possible, use
extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle
until you can reach a safe location or
repair shop.
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents
due to improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehicle control
is improved during emergency braking,
always maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The vehicle should be driven at reduced
speeds in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has different surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases the
stopping distance for your vehicle.
5 25
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force
being delivered to the brakes.
5 26
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the Anti-Lock Brake
System may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
W-78
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the ignition
switch is ON. During that time, the ABS
will go through self-diagnosis and the light
will go off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a problem
with your ABS but your regular brakes will
work normally. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
• When you drive on a road with poor
traction, such as an icy road, and operated your brakes continuously, the
ABS will be active continuously and the
ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull
your vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning
light is off, then your ABS is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a problem
with the ABS. Contact an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
OUB051018
✽ NOTICE
Electronic stability control (ESC)
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
No system, no matter how advanced, can
compensate for all driver error and/or
driving conditions. Always drive responsibly.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will not
prevent accidents. Excessive speed in
turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and attentive
driver can prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose
traction. Even with ESC installed, always
follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for
the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
5 27
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system
self-check and does not indicate a problem.
5 28
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel the engine management system of ESC,
press the ESC OFF button for
less than 3 seconds (ESC
OFF indicator light illuminates). The brake control
function still operates.
• To cancel the engine management and brake control
function of ESC, press the
ESC OFF button for more
than 3 seconds (ESC OFF
indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
Driving your vehicle
■ ESC indicator light
WARNING
- Electronic stability control
■ ESC OFF indicator light
Indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then goes
off if ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes on
when the ESC is turned off with the button.
Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes
may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your original tires.
Drive carefully even though your
vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control. It can only assist you in
maintaining control under certain
circumstances.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned
on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button while
ESC is operating (ESC indicator light
blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.
WARNING - Operating ESC
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
5 29
Driving your vehicle
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
Hill start Assist Control is a comfort function. The main intend is to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards while driving off uphill on an inclined surface. HAC
holds the braking pressure builtup by
driver during stopping procedure for 2
seconds after releasing brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
driver has enough time to press the
accelerator pedal to drive off.
The braking pressure is reduced as soon
as the system detects the driver’s intention to drive off.
5 30
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need to
apply brakes while stopped on an
incline. While stopped, make sure
you maintain brake pressure sufficient to prevent your vehicle from
rolling backward and causing an
accident. Don’t release the brake
pedal until you are ready to accelerate forward.
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESC is off but it does not activate when
the ESC has malfunctioned.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when braking.
Driving your vehicle
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC indicator light (
) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle and/or abnormal
steering responses (EPS). This is only
the effect of brake and EPS control and
indicates nothing unusual.
✽ NOTICE
No system, no matter how advanced,
can compensate for all driver error
and/or driving conditions. Always drive
responsibly.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light (
) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off
the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the
ESC OFF indicator light (
) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the Electric Power Steering system or VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light (
) or EPS warning light remains
on, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
• The VSM is designed to function above
approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) on
curves.
• The VSM is designed to function above
approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) when
a vehicle is braking on a split-mu road.
The split-mu road is made of surfaces
which have different friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management system is not a substitute for safe driving
practices but a supplementary function
only. It is the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold
the steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention, even
with installed VSM. Always follow all
the normal precautions for driving at
safe speeds for the conditions – including driving inclement weather and on a
slippery road.
5 31
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
WARNING - Tire/Wheel
size
When replacing tires and wheels,
make sure they are the same size
as the original tires and wheels
installed. Driving with varying tire
or wheel sizes may diminish any
supplemental safety benefits of the
VSM system.
5 32
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle
will not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because the
brakes might overheat and lose their
effectiveness. It also increases the wear
of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull
off the road and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle
creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill,
turn the front wheels away from the curb
to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If
there is no curb or if it is required by
other conditions to keep the vehicle
from rolling, block the wheels.
Driving your vehicle
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift lever
in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
5 33
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cruise control system allows you to
✽ NOTICE
program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
If the cruise control is left on, (CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise
control system off (CRUISE indicator light
OFF) when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
Use the cruise control system only when
traveling on open highways in good
weather.
Do not use the cruise control when driving
in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding
roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.
■ Type A
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
✽ NOTICE
To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position or
starting the engine. This is to check if
the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in normal
condition.
WARNING - Misuse cruise
control
Do not use cruise control if the traffic situation does not allow you to
drive safely at a constant speed
and with sufficient distance to the
vehicle in front.
5 34
OUB055080K
■ Type B
OUB055081K
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The
CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 40 km/h (25 mph).
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
OUB055082K
■ Type B
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.6 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operated in
this manner.
OUB055084K
■ Type B
OUB055083K
3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
SET indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator at the same time. The desired
speed will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
OUB055085K
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
5 35
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.6 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operated in
this manner.
OUB055082K
■ Type B
OUB055083K
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
5 36
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with the cruise control operation or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 15 km/h (9 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
OUB055087K
■ Type B
OUB055086K
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, move
the lever up (to RES+). You will return to
your previously preset speed.
■ Type A
OUB055084K
■ Type B
OUB055085K
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph):
If any method other than the CRUISE
ON-OFF switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed will
automatically resume when you move
the lever (1) up (to RES+).
5 37
Driving your vehicle
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
40 km/h (25 mph).
5 38
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument cluster
will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want to
resume the cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
Driving your vehicle
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ISG system, which reduces fuel consumption by automatically shutting down
the engine, when the vehicle is at a
standstill. (For example : red light, stop
sign and traffic jam)
The engine starts automatically as soon
as the starting conditions are met.
The ISG system is ON whenever the
engine is running.
■ Type A
The engine will stop and the green AUTO
STOP indicator (
) on the instrument
cluster will illuminate. If your vehicle is
equipped with the type B cluster, the
notice will illuminate on the LCD display.
OUB051006
■ Type B
✽ NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, ESC or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system is
malfunctioning.
OUB051007
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop mode
Stop the vehicle completely by pressing
the brake pedal.
The idle stop mode activates in case:
• The vehicle speed has exceeded 5
mph (8 km/h) at least once and the
shift lever is in the D (Drive) or N
(Neutral) position.
5 39
Driving your vehicle
Auto start
OUB051020
To restart the engine from idle stop
mode
The engine restarts from the idle stop
mode when:
• Releasing the brake pedal
• Moving the shift lever to R (Reverse)
position or sports mode with the brake
pedal depressed
• Moving the shift lever to N (Neutral)
position to D (Drive) position
■ Type A
OUB051006
■ Type B
The engine will start and the green AUTO
STOP Indicator (
) on the instrument
cluster will go out after blinking for 5 seconds
OUB051021
OUB051019
If you open the engine hood in auto stop
mode, the light on the ISG OFF button
will illuminate and ISG system is deactivated. If your vehicle is equipped with the
type B cluster, the notice will illuminate
on the LCD display.
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine manually.
The engine will restart automatically
without the driver’s any actions if the
following occurs:
- When the front defroster is on.
- The brake vaccum pressure is low.
- The battery charging status is low.
- The vehicle speed exceeds 1 mph (1.6
km/h).
- The fan speed is in the highest position
when the air conditioning is on.
5 40
Driving your vehicle
- Engine is turned off by Auto Stop for a
long time.
- If you unfasten the sea belt or open the
driver's door while depressing the brake
pedal.
- When a certain amount of time has
passed with the climate control system
on.
The green AUTO STOP indicator (
)
on the instrument cluster will go out after
blinking for 5 seconds and the notice will
illuminate on the LCD display (for type B
cluster)
Condition of ISG system operation
The ISG system will operate under
the following condition:
- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
- The driver’s door and hood are closed.
- The brake vaccum pressure is adequate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is more than
28.4°F (-2°C).
- The outside temperature is under
89.6°F (32°C).
- The engine coolant temperature is not
low.
- The vehicle is on a flat road surface.
OUB051022
OUB051067N
• If the ISG system does not meet that
operation condition, the ISG system is
deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF
button will illuminate.
• If the light comes on continuously,
please check the operation condition.
5 41
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
If the ISG OFF button light is not turned off
by pressing the ISG OFF button again or
if the ISG system continuously does not
work correctly, please contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Type : B
WARNING - Engine Repair
■ Type B
OUB051006/OUB051059
OUB051011
ISG system deactivation
• If you want to deactivate the ISG system, press the ISG OFF button. The
light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and the notice will illuminate on
the LCD display (for type B cluster).
• If you press the ISG OFF button again,
the system will be activated and the
light on the ISG OFF button will turn
off.
5 42
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (OFF) position or remove the
key from the ignition completely
before performing work on the
vehicle in the engine area. Failure
to do so could result in serious
injuries due to sudden engine reactivation.
✽ NOTICE
OUB051023
ISG system malfunction
The system may not operate when:
- The ISG related sensors or system
error occurs.
The yellow AUTO STOP indicator (
)
on the instrument cluster will stay on
after blinking for 5 seconds and the light
on the ISG OFF button will illuminate. If
your vehicle is equipped with cluster type
B cluster, the notice will illuminate on the
LCD display.
If the AGM battery is reconnected or
replaced, ISG function will not operate
immediately.
If you want to use the ISG function, the
battery sensor needs to be calibrated for
approximately 4 hours with the ignition
off and then, turn the engine on and off
2 or 3 times.
Driving your vehicle
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
OUB051066N
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency
by controlling the engine and transaxle.
But fuel-efficiency can be changed by the
driver's driving habits and road conditions.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the Active ECO
is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated, it
does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn off
the system, press the active ECO button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will return
to the normal mode.
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there is
no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is low:
The system will be limited until engine
performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because the
engine torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode:
The system will be limited according to
the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is deeply
pressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited, Judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
5 43
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
5 44
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the
brakes to overheat, which reduces
their effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. If you
drive your vehicle in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is required
(see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a very
high gear resulting in engine bucking. If
this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended
speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia
dealer perform scheduled inspections
and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine running. In addition, turning off the
ignition while driving could engage
the steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine braking
effect.
5 45
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light upand-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip
material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow,
or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an automatic
transaxle while driving on slippery
surfaces. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires to
skid and result in an accident.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free
it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the
area around your front wheels. Then, shift
back and forth between 1st (First) and R
(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a
manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped with an
automatic transaxle. Do not race the
engine, and spin the wheels as little as
possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow
vehicle to avoid engine overheating and
possible damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.
5 46
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage.
WARNING - Sudden
OUN056051
vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if
people or objects are nearby. The
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backwards as it becomes
unstuck.
OMC035004
Smooth cornering
Driving at night
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
5 47
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
1JBB3303
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
5 48
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving your vehicle
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks of
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for proper
inflation
before
driving.
Underinflated or overinflated tires
can cause poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries,
and even death. For proper tire
pressures, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both the engine coolant and
engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread before
driving your vehicle. Worn-out tires
can result in loss of vehicle control.
Worn-out tires should be replaced
as soon as possible. For further
information and tread limits, refer
to "Tires and wheels" in section 7.
5 49
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or Icy conditions
OBH058040
Severe weather conditions in the winter
result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter
driving, you should follow these suggestions:
5 50
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires on your
tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment tires.
Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your car.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in
front and your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against
their use.
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized Kia dealer
or a service station.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized Kia dealer
and most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of antifreeze as these may damage the paint
finish.
5 51
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
5 52
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window
scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a
blanket, etc.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door sill
gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the
number of people that can be in your
vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
385 kg (849 lb)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum
combined weight of occupants and
cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a
trailer, the combined weight includes the
tongue load.
OUB064016N/OUB064015N/OUB064018N
OUB064014N/OUB064019N/OUB064017N
5 53
Driving your vehicle
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum number
of occupants including a driver, your
vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may be
reduced based upon the weight of all of
the occupants, and the weight of the
cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there is a
limit to the total weight, or load limit
including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle will
increase or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of occupants and
the tongue load, if your vehicle is
equipped with a trailer.
5 54
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit 1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on
your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
"XXX" amount equals 635 kg (1400
lbs.) and there will be five 68 kg (150
lbs.) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or 1400750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
Example 1
A
Example 2
B
C
A
C190F01JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
385 kg
Weight
(849 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
136 kg
Weight
(300 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
Available Cargo and 249 kg
Luggage weight (549 lbs)
Example 3
B
C
A
C190F02JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
385 kg
Weight
(849 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
340 kg
Weight
(750 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 45 kg
Luggage weight
(99 lbs)
B
C
C190F03JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
385 kg
Weight
(849 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
370 kg
Weight
(815 lbs)
74 kg (163 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 15 kg
Luggage weight
(34 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.
5 55
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on the
driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is
called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum
weight that can be supported by the front
and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front
and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to
spread out your load equally on both
sides of the centerline.
5 56
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, the GAWR for either the
front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings
can affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
The label will help you decide how much
cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as
the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, the items
will keep going and can cause an injury if
they strike the driver or a passenger.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure,
increased stopping distances and
poor vehicle handling--all of which
may result in a crash.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured blunt
objects in the passenger compartment of your vehicle (e.g. suit
cases or unsecured child seats).
These items may strike occupant
during a sudden stop or crash.
✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not overload your
vehicle.
5 57
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the compliance label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
5 58
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s
door sill.
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-3
If the engine will not start / 6-4
Emergency starting / 6-5
If the engine overheats / 6-8
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-9
If you have a flat tire / 6-14
If you have a flat tire (Tire Mobility Kit) / 6-22
Towing / 6-28
What to do in an emergency
6
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
OUB045094N
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
6 2
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
down to such a speed that it is safe to
do so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If
you are on a divided highway, do not
park in the median area between the
two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this section.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
6 3
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If the engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at the
ignition coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
WARNING - Push/pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. Push or pull starting may
cause the catalytic converter to
overload and create a fire hazard.
6 4
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jumper Cables
CAUTION - 12 volt battery
(-)
(-)
(+)
Discharged battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
(+)
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which will
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
Booster battery
1VQA4001
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow these jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode.
risk
When jump starting your vehicle be
careful not to get acid on yourself,
your clothing or on the vehicle.
Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive.
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery is
frozen or if the electrolyte level is
low as the battery may rupture or
explode.
6 5
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batteries
are maintenance-free and should only be
serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. For
charging your AGM battery, use only fully
automatic battery chargers that are specially developed for AGM batteries.
When replacing the AGM battery, use
only the Kia genuine battery for the ISG
system.
✽ NOTICE
If the AGM battery is reconnected or
replaced, ISG function will not operate
immediately.
If you want to use the ISG function, the
battery sensor needs to be calibrated for
approximately 4 hours with the ignition
off and then, turn the engine on and off
2 or 3 times.
Do not open or remove the cap on top of
the battery. This may cause the leak of
dangerous internal electrolytes.
6 6
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near any part
that moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
WARNING - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
What to do in an emergency
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
6 7
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you will experience a loss of
power, or hear loud pinging or knocking,
the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle)
or
neutral
(manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from underneath the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until the
coolant has stopped running or the
steaming has stopped. If there is no
visible loss of engine coolant and no
steam, leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cooling
fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
6 8
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or
engine coolant leaks, stop the engine
immediately and call the nearest
authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates there is
a leak in the cooling system and this
should be checked as soon as possible
by an authorized Kia dealer.
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WK-14
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Even with the Tire-Pressure Monitoring
System, always check your tire pressure on a regular basis with a digital
tire gauge.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
6 9
What to do in an emergency
If the TPMS indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position or
engine is running, or If it comes on
after blinking for approximately one
minute, take your car to your nearest
authorized kia dealer and have the
system checked.
6 10
Low tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is illuminated, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated if
the tire pressure was adjusted to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not mean
your TPMS is malfunctioning because
the decreased temperature leads to a
proportional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or
lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation pressure.
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Do not drive on low pressure
tires. Significantly low tire pressure can cause the tires to overheat and fail making the vehicle
unstable resulting in increased
braking distances and a loss of
vehicle control.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under inflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized kia dealer as soon as
possible to determine the cause of
the problem.
The TPMS malfunction indicator may
be illuminated if the vehicle is moving
around electric power supply cables
or radios transmitter such as at police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations, military
installations, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
The TPMS malfunction indicator may
illuminate if snow chains or some
separately purchased devices such
as notebook computers, mobile
charger, remote starter, navigation
etc. are used in the vehicle. This can
interfere with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
6 11
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure will come on. Have the flat
tire repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible or replace
the flat tire with the spare tire.
CAUTION - Repair Agents
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by Kia to
repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. The tire sealant not
approved by Kia may damage
the tire pressure sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
6 12
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale will blink or remain
on until the low pressure tire is
repaired and placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with, the TPMS spare tire, the
Low Tire Pressure telltale may blink
or illuminate after a few minutes
because the TPMS sensor mounted
on the spare wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS
malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If original mounted tire is replaced
with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor
on the replaced spare wheel should
be initiated and the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel should
be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor
on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tire carrier still activates, the tire pressure monitoring
system may not operate properly.
Have the tire with TPMS serviced or
replaced by an authorized kia dealer.
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
The TPMS cannot alert you to severe
and sudden tire damage caused by
external factors such as nails or road
debris.
If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly
move to a safe position off the road.
✽ NOTICE
Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for
that portion of the vehicle.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
6 13
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OUB061002
Jack and tools
The spare tire, jack, jack handle and
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in
the luggage compartment.
Remove the luggage under tray out
of the way to reach the equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
6 14
WARNING - Changing tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
Always move the vehicle completely
off the road and onto the shoulder
before trying to change a tire. The
jack should be used on firm level
ground. If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.
Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehicle;
never use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack support.
WARNING - Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
What to do in an emergency
Do not allow anyone to remain in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
Make sure any children present are
in a secure place away from the road
and from the vehicle to be raised with
the jack.
WARNING - Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
OUB061003
OED066033
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or
P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
6 15
What to do in an emergency
To prevent vehicle movement while
changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
We recommend that the wheels of
the vehicle be chocked, and that no
person remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
1VQA4023
OUB061005
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
6 16
What to do in an emergency
OUB065008
OUB061006
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1 in). Before
removing the wheel lug nuts, make
sure the vehicle is stable and that
there is no chance for movement or
slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
Wheels and wheel covers may have
sharp edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure
that there is nothing on the hub or
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that prevents the wheel from fitting
solidly against the hub.
6 17
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
OUB061007
Then position the wrench as shown in
the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.
Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the
wrench handle or use an extension
pipe over the wrench handle.
Go around the wheel tightening every
nut following the numerical sequence
shown in the image until they are tight.
Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing the wheels, have
an authorized Kia dealer tighten the
wheel nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
6 18
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
Do not drive your vehicle with
damaged wheel studs. If the
studs are damaged, they may
lose their ability to retain the
wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
Important - use of compact spare tire
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
You should drive carefully when the
compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and rim at
the first opportunity.
The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
6 19
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Spare tire
Do not operate your vehicle on
this compact spare at speeds
over 80 km/h (50 mph). The
compact spare tire is for emergency use only. The original tire
should be repaired or replaced
as soon as is possible to avoid
failure of the spare.
The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
6 20
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should you
exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a higher
speed could damage the tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough
for the road conditions to avoid all
hazards. Any road hazard, such as a
pothole or debris, could seriously
damage the compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life is
shorter than a regular tire. Inspect
your compact spare tire regularly
and replace worn compact spare
tires with the same size and design,
mounted on the same wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car components may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
■ Example
• Type A
OHYK064001
• Type B
OHYK064005
• Type C
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064002
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6 21
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
When two or more tires are flat, do not
use the tire mobility kit because the
supported one sealant of Tire Mobility
Kit is only used for one flat tire.
WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.
OUB061009
OUB065010L
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails or
similar objects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 200
km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of
80 km/h (50 MPH) in order to reach
a service station or tire dealer for the
tire replacement.
6 22
What to do in an emergency
It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the Tire
Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below 30°C (-22°F).
6 23
What to do in an emergency
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
past the expiration date on the
sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
OAM060015L
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
6 24
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Screw cap for reducing tire inflation pressure
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Strictly
follow
the
specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
What to do in an emergency
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.
2. Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is
closed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200kpa (29 PSI). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
OUB065010L
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
8. With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle running in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
6 25
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10km (4~6miles or about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road. If this
occures, call for roadside service or
towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be stained by sealant.
Therefore, remove the tire pressure
sensors and wheel stained by
sealant and have it serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
6 26
Checking the tire inflation pressure
1.After
driving
approximately
7~10km (4 ~6miles or about
10min), stop at a safe location.
2.Connect connection hose (9) of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3.Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pressure : Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
✽ NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pressure: Loosen the screw cap (8)
on the compressor hose.
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors in authorized dealer.
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor: 170 x 150 x 60 mm
(6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.)
Sealant bottle: 85 x ø 77 mm
(3.3 x ø 3.0 in.)
Compressor weight:
0.8 kg (1.8 lbs)
Sealant volume:
200 ml (12.2 cu. in.)
6 27
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.
A
B
dolly
OED066013
OED066011
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck
service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage
to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.
6 28
OED066014
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
■ 4 door
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Always place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) when towing
your vehicle. Failure to place the
transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral)
may cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
OUB065025
■ 5 door
OUB065011
Removable towing hook (front)
(if equipped)
1. Remove the towing hook from the tool
case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front
bumper.
6 29
What to do in an emergency
Front
OUB065012L
Rear
OUB065013L
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you have it done by an authorized Kia
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
6 30
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot
be driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.
• Attach a towing strap to the towing
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle other
than the tow hooks for towing may
damage the body of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily
with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
What to do in an emergency
OED066029
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in
the middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transmission, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile)
when towing.
• Before towing, check for an automatic transmission fluid leak
under your vehicle. If the automatic transmission fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.
If the car is being towed with all four
wheels on the ground, it can be towed
only from the front. Be sure that the
transmission is in neutral. Be sure the
steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver
must be in the towed vehicle to operate
the steering and brakes.
6 31
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-5
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-31
Engine oil / 7-34
Engine coolant / 7-36
Brake/clutch fluid / 7-39
Automatic transaxle fluid / 7-40
Washer fluid / 7-40
Parking brake / 7-41
Air cleaner / 7-41
Climate control air filter / 7-42
Wiper blades / 7-42
Battery / 7-45
Tires and wheels / 7-48
Maintenance
Fuses / 7-61
Light bulbs / 7-73
Appearance care / 7-86
Emission control system / 7-92
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OUB071103N
7 2
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized Kia dealer perform
this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factorytrained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see an
authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Warranty & Consumer Information
manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. An authorized Kia dealer
meets Kia’s high service quality standards and receives technical support
from Kia in order to provide you with a
high level of service satisfaction.
7 3
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an
authorized Kia dealer with special tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Consumer Information
manual provided with the vehicle. If
you're unsure about any servicing or
maintenance procedure, have it done by
an authorized Kia dealer.
7 4
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing while working under the hood
of your vehicle with the engine running. These can become entangled
in moving parts. If you must run the
engine while working under the
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings,
bracelets, watches, and necklaces)
and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling fans.
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at
the frequencies indicated to help ensure
safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in the straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hardto-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
7 5
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
7 6
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check the windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean the wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened with
washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean the body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of
the following conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km(10 miles) in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition
If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following
Normal Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 240,000 km (150,000 miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance
intervals.
7 7
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
(Continued)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
7 8
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
(Continued)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Continued)
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 18 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7 10
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
(Continued)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)
7 11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 12
❑ Add fuel additive *A
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 13
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 42 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 14
❑ Add fuel additive *A
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First, 96,000 km or 72 months
after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
Lubricate all locks and hinges
Parking brakes
Steering operation and linkage
Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
11)
12)
13)
14)
3
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic
inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality.
*3 Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is
recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 15
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 54 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 16
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months
(Continued)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Continued)
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7 17
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 66 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
7 18
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
7 19
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 78 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
7 20
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 84 months
(Continued)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated),
(Every 150,000 km or 120 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *A
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
7 21
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 90 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 22
❑ Add fuel additive *A
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 96 months
(Continued)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect drive belt *
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
4
❑ Replace engine coolant*5
(First, 192,000 km or 120 months after every 48,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect valve clearance *3
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
(Continued)
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic
inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality.
*3 Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*5 When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your
vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.
An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine
damage.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is
recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7 23
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 102 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
7 24
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 108 months
(Continued)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 25
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 102 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
7 26
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 120 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and
performance (if equipped)
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect cooling system *1
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect drive belt *4
(First 96,000 km or 72 months after
every 24,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Replace engine coolant *5
(First 192,000 km or 120 months
after every 48,000 km or 24 months)
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑ Add fuel additive *A
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic
inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*5 When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your
vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.
An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine
damage.
*A If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is
recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
(Continued)
7 27
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
7 28
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart
below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
R
EVERY 6,000 km OR 6 MONTHS
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
SPARK PLUGS
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
A, B, H, I, K
DISC BRAKE/ PADS,
CALIPERS AND ROTORS
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS,
PARKING BRAKE
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER
ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
I
EVERY 12,000 km OR 6 MONTHS
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
MAINTENANCE ITEM
7 29
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL*
R
EVERY 120,000 km
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID*
R
EVERY 96,000 km
A, C, E, F, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving shorts distances of less than 8 km in normal
temperature or less than 16 km in freezing temperature
E - Driving in heavy dust condition
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very
cold weather
J - Driving over 170 km/h
F - Driving in heavy traffic area
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
* : if equipped
7 30
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter (for gasoline)
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is
being driven in severe conditions, more
frequent oil and filter changes are
required.
Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a lifetime fuel filter that integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed but depends on fuel
quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
etc, fuel filter inspection or replace is
needed.
The fuel filter be Inspected or replaced
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized Kia dealer replace any
damaged or leaking parts immediately.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
7 31
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
Coolant
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Valve clearance (if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized Kia dealer should perform
the operation.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system components,
such as the radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage and
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid should
be changed at an authorized Kia dealer
in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
This is a normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace the
fluid based upon the changed color.
7 32
CAUTION - Specified fluid
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle
fluid.
(Refer
to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake/Clutch (if equipped) fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the
side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic
brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT
4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables.
Maintenance
Rear brake drums and linings
(if equipped)
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
Check the rear brake drums and linings
for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken
parts, and excessive wear.
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
(if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.
7 33
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
OAM072001
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
7 34
CAUTION - Replace engine
oil
Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
OAM072003
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
7 35
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when working near the blade of the
cooling fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine
coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure and vehicle speed. It may
sometimes operate even when the
engine is not running.
7 36
OAM072005
Checking the coolant level
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent coolant addition is required, see an
authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.
CAUTION - Removing radiator cap
Never attempt to remove
the radiator cap while
the engine is operating
or hot. Doing so might
lead to cooling system
and engine damage.
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Ambient
Temperature
Antifreeze
Water
-15°C (5°F)
35
65
-25°C (-13°F)
40
60
-35°C (-31°F)
50
50
-45°C (-49°F)
60
OAM072006
40
WARNING
Radiator cap
Turn the engine off and wait until it cools
down. Use care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it,
and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system. When
you are sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap, using a
thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pressure.
7 37
Maintenance
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the
alternator.
7 38
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake/clutch fluid in
brake/clutch
system.
Small
amounts of improper fluids (such
as engine oil) can cause damage to
the brake/clutch system.
OUB071007
Checking the brake/clutch* fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the area
around the reservoir cap thoroughly to
prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamination.
* if equipped
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings
and/or clutch disc (if equipped). If the
fluid level is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch* system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
When changing and adding brake/clutch*
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come
in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch*
fluid should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have your
eyes examined by a doctor as soon as
possible.
CAUTION - Brake/clutch
fluid
Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly.
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake/clutch* system
requires frequent additions of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
7 39
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
FLUID
WASHER FLUID
WARNING - Windshield
It is recommended that the automatic
transaxle fluid should be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
In severe conditions, the fluid should be
changed at an authorized Kia dealer in
accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.
fluid
Do not drink the windshield washer
fluid. The windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and animals.
WARNING - Flammable
fluid
OUB071009
Checking the washer fluid level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
7 40
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open flames
or sparks. The windshield washer
fluid is flammable under certain circumstances. This can result in a
fire.
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
AIR CLEANER
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended
intervals.
(Refer
to
“Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in this section.)
CAUTION - Air filter
maintenance
OUB051016
OUB071010
Checking the parking brake
Filter replacement
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
dealer.
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
nongenuine part could damage
the air flow sensor.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 20 kg
(44 lbs, 196 N).
7 41
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the Maintenance
Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you replace the
climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other components.
1JBA5122
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
7 42
CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Maintenance
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, do not attempt to
move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper blade
could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
1JBA7037
1LDA5023
Front windshield wiper blade
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
1JBA7038
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
7 43
Maintenance
OED076040
OED076041
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, have an authorized
Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.
7 44
Maintenance
BATTERY
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep Lit cigarettes and all
other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
The battery contains hydrogen -- a highly combustible
gas, which will explode if it
comes in contact with a
flame or spark.
OUB071017
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
in batteries
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID
and electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into your
eyes, flush your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 minutes and
get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contacted
area. If you feel pain or burning
sensation, get medical attention
immediately.
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to an
authorized Kia dealer to be recycled.
7 45
Maintenance
Battery recharging
WARNING - Recharging
battery
Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are
connected.
When you don’t use the vehicle for a long
time in the low temperature area, separate the battery and keep it indoors.
WARNING - Risk of electrocution
Never touch the electrical ignition
system while the vehicle is running. This system works with high
voltage which can "zap" you.
7 46
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at no
more than 20-30A for two hours.
When recharging the battery, observe
the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from the
vehicle and placed in an area with
good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during charging, and
stop or reduce the charging rate if the
battery cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature of the
electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C
(120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking
the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in the
following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from the
negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from the
positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last when
the battery is disconnected.
Maintenance
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
7 47
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
7 48
WARNING - Tire underin-
OUB071018
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
flation
Inflate your tires consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe underinflation
(70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can
lead to severe heat build-up,
causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
Maintenance
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than 1.6
km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire guage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
7 49
Maintenance
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire guage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
7 50
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km miles (7,500) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
Without a spare tire
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
CBGQ0707A
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Maintenance
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Do not use the compact spare tire for
tire rotation.
WARNING - Mixing tire
types
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
Tread wear indicator
OEN076053
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
✽ NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that
affects driving performance.
7 51
Maintenance
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. Tire size can
affect wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) (if equipped) to
work irregularly.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
7 52
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height.
CAUTION - Wheel
Wheels that do not meet Kia's
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/55R16 89H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
89 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 53
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicles. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
7 54
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
240 km/h (Above 149 mph)
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2017.
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
Maintenance
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where
applicable, on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 440
TRACTION A
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
7 55
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
7 56
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories
are,
automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi) before a tire has
built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Maintenance
Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5
lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
7 57
Maintenance
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called "wear bars," that
show across the tread of a tire when
only 2/32 inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
7 58
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Maintenance
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4
psi) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard
tires on the tire label on the driver's
side of the center pillar, or up to the
maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio
is lower than 50, are provided for sporty
looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires are
optimized for handling and braking, it
may be more uncomfortable to ride in
and there is more noise compare with
normal tires.
7 59
Maintenance
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
7 60
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see the tire damage with your own
eyes, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on
a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information
on the tire sidewall.
Maintenance
FUSES
Blade type
B l ow n
Cartridge type
B l ow n
Fusible link
B l ow n
OTA070039
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one located in the driver’s side panel bolster, the
other in the engine compartment near
the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will
melt.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or addon electric wiring of the vehicle.
CAUTION - Fuse replacement
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
7 61
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ depending on equipment/options.
CAUTION - Fuse
Replacement
Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause contact
failure and system malfunction.
7 62
WARNING - Electrical Fire
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that you
consult with an authorized Kia
dealer.
OUB071019
Instrument panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
Maintenance
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
If the memory fuse is pulled up from the
fuse panel, the warning chime, audio,
clock and interior lamps, etc., will not
operate. Some items must be reset after
replacement. Refer to “Battery” in this
section.
Even though the memory fuse is pulled
up, the battery can still be discharged by
operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.
OUB071021
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with the memory fuse to prevent battery discharge if
your vehicle is parked without being
operated for prolonged periods. Use the
following procedures before parking the
vehicle for prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
7 63
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Fuse panel
covers
OUB071022
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the tap and pulling up the cover.
When the blade type fuse is disconnected, remove it by using the clip
designed for changing fuses located in
the engine room fuse box. Upon
removal, securely insert reserve fuse
of equal quantity.
7 64
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover to prevent electrical failures which may
occur from water leaking in.
OUB071023N
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
7 65
Maintenance
OUB071025
Instrument panel fuse panel
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ depending on equipment/options.
OUB075064N
7 66
Maintenance
OUB071026
Engine compartment fuse panel
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ depending on equipment/options.
OUB075114N
7 67
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
POWER OUTLET
C/LIGHTER
Fuse rating
15A
Power Outlet
20A
Cigarette Lighter
Circuit Protected
Front Map Lamp, Power Outside Mirror Switch, BCM,
Low DC-DC Convertor, Smart Key Control Module, Audio,
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Digital Clock
ACC
10A
A/BAG IND
10A
Instrument Cluster
A/BAG
10A
SBR PAB Indicator, SRS Control Module
Passenger Weight Classification Sensor
MODULE 2
MDPS
WIPER RR
HTD STRG
FOG LAMP RR
FOG LAMP FRT
MODULE 1
10A
10A
15A
15A
10A
15A
10A
BCM
EPS Control Module
Multifunction Switch, Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor
Steering Wheel Heater
Front Fog Lamp Relay
ATM Shift Lever Switch, Door Warning Switch
STOP LAMP
15A
Data Link Connector, Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
Stop Lamp Relay, PCB Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay)
CLUSTER
10A
Audio, BCM, ATM Shift Lever ILL., Crash Pad Switch
Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module
IG1 1
10A
Multipurpose Check Connector, Driver CCS Seat Warmer Module
Passenger Seat Warmer Module
With ISG : Crash Pad Switch, Low DC-DC Convertor
ABS
10A
Crash Pad Switch, ESC Module
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay)
B/UP LAMP
10A
Back-Up Lamp Switch
7 68
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
IG1 2
10A
Vehicle Speed Sensor, Stop Lamp Switch, Inverter
A/C Control Module
HAZARD
PDM 1
SUNROOF
15A
25A
15A
Hazard Switch, BCM
Smart Key Control Module
Sunroof Motor
PDM 2
10A
Immobilizer Module, Start/Stop Button Switch,
Smart Key Control Module
ECU
15A
Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module,
ECM/PCM, Transaxle Range Switch
IG2
10A
BCM, Smart Key Control Module, Driver CCS Seat Warmer Module
Cluster Ionizer, Rain Sensor, A/C Control Module, Sunroof Motor
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay, Head Lamp (HI) Relay,
Fuel Pump #1 Relay)
WIPER FRT
25A
Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper Motor
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Rain Sensor Relay, Front Wiper Relay)
DOOR LOCK
20A
Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Unlock Relay,
Two Turn Unlock Relay
SAFETY POWER
WINDOW
25A
Driver Safety Power Window Module
S/HEATER
15A
Seat Warmer Switch, Driver CCS Seat Warmer Module,
Passenger Seat Warmer Module
FOLD'G MIRR
10A
Power Outside Mirror Switch
10A
BCM, Door Warning Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module
Instrument Cluster, Digital Clock, A/C Control Module
Luggage Lamp
ROOM LP
7 69
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
AUDIO
20A
With ISG : Low DC-DC Convertor
W/O ISG : Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
TAIL LAMP LH
10A
Head Lamp LH, License Lamp
Rear Combination Lamp (IN/OUT) LH
TAIL LAMP RH
10A
Head Lamp RH, License Lamp, ILL. (+),
Rear Combination Lamp (IN/OUT) RH
START
10A
With Burglar Alarm : Burglar Alarm Relay
W/O Burglar Alarm : Transaxle Range Switch (A/T),
Smart Key Control Module (M/T), Ignition Lock Switch (M/T),
ECM (M/T), PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay) (M/T)
P/WDW LH
25A
Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH
Driver Safety Power Window Module
P/WDW RH
25A
Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH
Passenger Power Window Switch
HTD MIRR
10A
ECM/PCM, A/C Control Module
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
A/CON
10A
A/C Control Module
7 70
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
MULTI
FUSE
FUSE
Fuse Name
MDPS
ALT
Fuse rating
80A
EPS Control Module
125A
Alternator
Circuit Protected
B+1
50A
I/P Junction Box (Power Connector Fuse : ROOM LP 10A / AUDIO 20A,
Fuse : FOG LP FRT 15A / MODULE 1 10A / STOP LP 15A, Tail Lamp Relay)
INVERTER
40A
Inverter
B+2
50A
I/P Junction Box (Fuse : HAZARD 15A / PDM 1 25A / PDM 2 10A / SUNROOF 15A /
DR LOCK 20A / SAFETY POWER WINDOW 25A / S/HEATER 2 15A,
FOLD'G MIRR 10A / Power Window Relay)
IG1
40A
With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (ESCL (ACC) Relay, ESCL (IG1) Relay)
W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch
ABS1
ABS2
RR HTD
ECU5
H/LP HI IND
40A
40A
40A
10A
10A
ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ESC Module
I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)
PCM
Instrument Cluster
7 71
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
IG2
40A
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay), W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch,
With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (ESCL (IG2) Relay)
ECU1
ECU3
BLOWER
C/FAN
F/PUMP
H/LAMP HI
H/LAMP
HORN
ECU2
B/UP LAMP
WIPER
ECU4
INJECTOR
H/LAMP LH
30A
10A
40A
40A
20A
20A
20A
10A
10A
10A
10A
20A
15A
10A
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Engine Control Relay, ECU2 10A)
Not Used
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling Fan (Low) Relay, Cooling Fan (Hi) Relay)
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Fuel Pump #1 Relay)
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp (HI) Relay)
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp (LO) Relay)
PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Horn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
M/T - ECM, A/T - E/R Junction Box (ECU_VM 10A)
A/T - PCM, Transaxle Range Switch
ECM/PCM, Rain Sensor
ECM/PCM
ECM/PCM, PCB Fuse & Relay Box (Fuel Pump #1 Relay)
Head Lamp LH
SENSOR
10A
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Oxygen Sensor(Up/Down), Variable Intake
Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve
IGN COIL
H/LAMP RH
20A
10A
CONDENSOR, IGNITION COIL #1/#2/#3/#4
Head Lamp RH
7 72
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
WARNING - Lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position and turn off
the lights to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION - Light
replacement
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
If you don’t have necessary tools, the
correct bulbs and the expertise, consult
an authorized Kia dealer. In many cases,
it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle must
be removed before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you have to
remove the headlight assembly to get to
the bulb(s). Removing/installing the
headlight assembly can result in damage
to the vehicle.
7 73
Maintenance
■ 4 door
■ 5 door
- Type A
OUB075028K
OUB075110
- Type B
OHD076046
Headlight bulb
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, side marker light and
front fog light bulb replacement
WARNING - Halogen bulbs
• 4 door
(1) Headlight (High and DRL/Low)
(2) Position light
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Front fog light*
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
Halogen bulbs contain pressurized
gas that will produce flying pieces
of glass if broken.
OUB075052K
• 5 door
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Position light/DRL
(5) Front side marker
(6) Front fog light*
* : if equipped
7 74
Maintenance
Always handle them carefully, and avoid
scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are
lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands. Residual oil
may cause the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked,
replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when changing a
bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before
handling it.
1. Turn off the engine and open the hood.
If you can reach the bulb without
removing the headlight assembly, continue to step 4.
2. Remove the front bumper upper cover.
3. Remove the headlight assembly from
the body of the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the power connector(s)
from the back of the headlight assembly.
OUB071073
Headlight(High/Low)
• 4 door
5. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
6. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and pushing it right ward.
7. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the shape on the bulb housing
in the assembly. Pushing the spring
holder in to the slot.
10. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise
7 75
Maintenance
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
10. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
If the headlight aiming adjustment is necessary after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
OUB071030N
OUB071029
Headlight (High)
• 5 door
5. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
6. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and pushing it down ward.
7. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the shape on the bulb housing
in the assembly. Pushing the spring
holder in to the slot.
10. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlight (Low)
• 5 door
Follow the steps 1 to 4 from the previous
section.
5. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
6. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
7. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7 76
Maintenance
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
OUB071031N
Turn signal light/Position light or Side
marker
Follow the steps 1 to 4 from the previous
page.
5. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket
Position light (if equipped)
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
OUB071055
■ 4 door
OUB071077
■ 5 door
OUB071056
7 77
Maintenance
Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)
1. Remove the under cover by rotating
the screws.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
6 Connect the power connector to the
socket.
7 78
OUB071034
Side repeater light bulb replacement (if equipped)
Type A
If the light bulb does not operate,have the
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer. A skilled technician should check
or repair the side repeater lamp, for it
may damage related out side mirror parts
of the vehicle.
OUB071057
Type B
1. Remove the light assembly from the
vehicle by prying the lens and pulling
the assembly out.
2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.
3. Separate the socket and the lens parts
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the lens part.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
6. Reassemble the socket and the lens
part.
7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the body
of the vehicle.
Maintenance
Stop and tail light
(LED type, if equipped)
If the light (LED) does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
■ 4 door
OUB075113
■ 5 door
OUB071069K
Outside light
Rear turn signal light and tail/stop light
• 4 door
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk lid.
3. Remove the service cover by pulling
out the service cover.
OUB071036
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
7 79
Maintenance
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
OUB071070K
OUB071037
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
• 5 door
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
7 80
Maintenance
8. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
9. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OUB071038
OUB071071K
5. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
Inside light
Back-up light/tail light
• 4 door
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk
lid cover and then remove the cover.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align
with the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it until the tabs
on the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
7 81
Maintenance
OUB071072K
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket into the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by pushing
in the screw.
7 82
OUB071039
• 5 door
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover.
OUB071058
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align
with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
6. Reinstall the socket in the assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
OUB075112
OUB075107K
High mounted stop light replacement
• 4 door
1. Turn off the engine
2. Open the trunk
7 83
Maintenance
OUB071042
OUB071061N
5. Loosen the retaining nuts.
6. Remove the washer hose socket from
the lamp assembly by turning the
socket counter clockwise until the tabs
on the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Reinstall a new light assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
OUB071060N
• 5 door
1. Turn off the engine
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Gently remove the rubber cover (1).
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7 84
OUB071043
License plate light bulb replacement
1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket and
install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.
Maintenance
■ Map lamp
Interior light bulb replacement
■ Glove box lamp
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
WARNING - Interior lights
■ Room lamp
■ Luggage room lamp (5 door)
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the "OFF" button is pressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
OUB071044/OAM079038
OUB071047/OUB071046
7 85
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
7 86
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each offroad trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the brakes
while driving slowly to see if they have
been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while maintaining a
slow forward speed.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Maintenance
OJB037800
CAUTION - Wetting engine
• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure
water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
7 87
Maintenance
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergents. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces vehicles of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle
is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly
important. Some of the common causes
of accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
7 88
Maintenance
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the vehicle surfaces by
moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it
dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle
clean and free of mud or accumulations
of other materials. This applies not only
to the visible surfaces but particularly to
the underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your vehicle
at least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the vehicle,
give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your vehicle
in the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
7 89
Maintenance
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting and cause corrosion.
Check under the mats periodically to be
sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular
care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning
materials or chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
7 90
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.
Natural leather seat cover using
precautions (If equipped)
Natural leather has visible pores, scars
or blood vessels, etc. Pressure marks or
wrinkles may be made when used.
Prolonged exposure to sunlight or heat
may cause discoloration. These things
occur due to the natural characteristics of
cowhides. If the leather is exposed to rain
or gets wet, remove water with a dry
cloth and dry the leather in the shade to
minimize damage.
Make sure to keep sharp objects away
from the leather as these can create
scratches on the surface. For light-colored leather, be careful of spots or color
transfer, such as from jeans.
Maintenance
Fabric seat cover using
precautions (If equipped)
Please clean the fabric seats regularly
with a vacuum cleaner in consideration of
fabric material characteristics. If they are
heavily soiled with beverage stains, etc.,
use a suitable interior cleaner. To prevent
damage to seat covers, wipe off the seat
covers down to the seams with a large
wiping motion and moderate pressure
using a soft sponge or microfiber cloth.
Velcro closures on clothing or sharp
objects may cause snagging or scratches on the surface of the seats.
Make sure not to rub such objects
against the surface.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear windows
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
7 91
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Warranty &
Consumer Information manual in your
vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control systems, as follows.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase. This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
2. Evaporative emission control
(including ORVR: Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery)
system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle
inspected and maintained by an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in this manual.
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow
the vapors from the fuel tank to be
loaded into a canister while refueling at
the gas station, preventing the escape of
fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)
7 92
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
devices.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
7 93
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic converter and exhaust system while
the vehicle is running or immediately thereafter. The exhaust and
catalytic systems are very hot and
may burn you.
7 94
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. A hot
exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Engine / 8-2
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-3
Tires and wheels / 8-5
Weight/Volume / 8-6
Air conditioning system / 8-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-7
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-9
Vehicle certification label / 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-10
Engine number / 8-10
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
ENGINE
Item
Gasoline 1.6
1,591
(97.09)
Displacement [cc(cu.in)]
77 x 85.44
(3.03 x 3.36)
Bore x Stroke [mm(in)]
Firing order
1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders
4, In-line
DIMENSIONS
Item
Overall length
mm (in)
4 door
4,370 (172)
5 door
4,050 (159.4)
Overall width
1,720 (67.7)
Overall height
1,455 (57.2)
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
8 2
185/65R15
1,520 (59.8)
195/55R16
1,507 (59.3)
205/45R17
1,507 (59.3)
185/65R15
1,525 (60)
195/55R16
1,511 (59.4)
205/45R17
1,511 (59.4)
2,570 (101.1)
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
BULB WATTAGE
■ 5 door
Light Bulb
Head lamp
Front
Rear
Low
High
Position lamp
DRL (Day time Running Lamp)*
Turn signal lamp
Front fog lamp*
Side marker light
Inside
Tail lamp
Outside
Inside
Stop lamp
Outside
Turn signal lamp
Back up lamp
High mounted stop lamp
License plate lamp
Side marker light*
Map lamps*
Room lamps
Interior Luggage lamp
Glove box lamp
Vanity mirror lamps*
Wattage
Bulb type
55W
55W
8W or LED
21W or LED
21W or 28W
55W
5W
5W or LED
8W or LED
LED
28W or LED
21W
16W
LED
5W X 2EA
H11B
H1
PY28/8W or LED
P21/5W or LED
PY21W or PY28/8W
9006
W5W
W5W or LED
P28/8W or LED
LED
P28/8W or LED
PY21W
W16W
LED
W5W
as tail bulb*
LED*
W10W
FESTON
FESTON
FESTON
FESTON
LED
10W X 2EA
10W
5W
5W
5W
* : if equipped
8 3
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
■ 4 door
Light Bulb
Head lamp
Front
Rear
Day time Running Lamp
Position lamp
Turn signal lamp
Front fog lamp*
Side marker light
Inside
Tail lamp
Outside
Inside
Stop lamp
Outside
Turn signal lamp
Back up lamp
High mounted stop lamp
License plate lamp
Side marker light
Map lamps*
Room lamps
Interior Luggage lamp
Glove box lamp
Vanity mirror lamps*
* : if equipped
8 4
Low
High
Wattage
Bulb type
55W
60W
HB2
HB2
HB2
W5W
PY28/8W
9006
W5W
P27/8W or LED
P27/8W or LED
LED
P27/8W or LED
PY21W
W16W
W16W
W5W
as tail bulb
LED*
W10W
FESTON
FESTON
FESTON
FESTON
5W
28W
55W
5W
8W or LED
8W or LED
LED
27W or LED
21W
16W
16W
5W X 2EA
LED
10W X 2EA
10W
5W
5W
5W
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
Cold tire inflation pressure kPa (psi)
Item
Tire size
Wheel size
Normal load
Maximum load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Full size tire
P185/65R15*
P195/55R16*
P205/45R17*
5.5J X 15
6.0J X 16
6.5J X 17
230
(33)
230
(33)
230
(33)
230
(33)
Compact*
spare tire
T125/80D15
3.5J X 15
420
(60)
420
(60)
420
(60)
420
(60)
Wheel lug nut torque
kgf•m (lbf•ft, N•m)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
* : if equipped
✽ NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 21 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
Tires typically loose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every -11°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected,
re-check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects driving performance.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please check the tire
pressure and add more air when necessary.
Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 10.5 kPa (1.5 psi)/km
8 5
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
WEIGHT/VOLUME
Gasoline 1.6
Item
4 Door
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
Luggage volume
4 Door (SAE)
l (cu ft)
5 Door (VDA)
5 Door
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
1,630
(3,593)
1,660
(3,660)
1,600
(3,527)
1,630
(3,593)
Min.
389 (13.7)
Max.
-
Min.
288 (10)
Max.
923 (32)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Item
Refrigerant
Compressor lubricant
Weight of volume
Classification
445 ~ 495g
(0.98 ~ 1.09 lbs)
R-134a
110 ~ 130 cc
PAG (FD46XG)
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
8 6
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Volume
Classification
3.6 l (3.8 US qt.)
API Service SM*3,ILSAC GF-4 or above,
ACEA A5 or above
1.6 ~ 1.7 l
(1.7 ~ 1.8 US qt.)
API GL-4, SAE 70W approved by Kia Motors Corp.
1.6 Engine
7.3 l (7.71 US qt.)
ATF SP-IV (Recommended MICHANG, SK,
NOCA, Kia genuine)
Automatic transaxle
5.5 l (5.6 US qt.)
Manual transaxle
5.3 l (5.8 US qt.)
Engine oil * *
(drain and refill)
Recommended
(or equivalent)
1
2
Manual transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid
Coolant
Brake/Clutch fluid
Fuel
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
43 l (11.4 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
* Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
1
8 7
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area around
any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick
before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in dusty or
sandy areas and when the vehicle is
used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the
plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operation (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *1
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if
the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8 8
50
120
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
VIN Label (if equipped)
OUB081001
OVQ076002N
OUB081005N
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to
its ownership, etc.
VIN label
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
The vehicle certification label attatched
on the driver’s side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
8 9
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
OUB081004N
OUB071018
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
8 10
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
Index
I
Index
A
Active ECO system························································5-43
Active ECO operation ·················································5-43
Limitation of Active ECO operation: ··························5-43
AIR BAG - advanced supplemental restraint system ····3-33
Adding equipment to or modifying your air
bag-equipped vehicle·················································3-55
Air bag warning label··················································3-56
Air bag warning light ··················································3-36
Curtain air bag ·····························································3-49
Driver's and passenger's front air bag··························3-44
How does the air bag system operate··························3-34
Occupant detection system··········································3-39
Side impact air bag······················································3-47
SRS Care ·····································································3-55
SRS components and functions···································3-36
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision?
(Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag) ···3-50
Air cleaner ·····································································7-41
Filter replacement························································7-41
Air conditioning system···················································8-6
Appearance care·····························································7-86
Exterior care ································································7-86
Interior care ·································································7-90
Audio system ·······························································4-121
I 2
Antenna······································································4-121
Aux, USB and iPod® ·················································4-123
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology·······························4-122
How vehicle audio works ··········································4-123
Steering wheel audio control·····································4-122
Automatic climate control system ·································4-94
Automatic heating and air conditioning······················4-95
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant ········································4-104
Climate control air filter ············································4-103
Manual heating and air conditioning···························4-96
System operation ·······················································4-101
Automatic transaxle brake system·································5-16
Automatic transaxle operation·····································5-16
Good driving practices ················································5-21
Automatic transaxle fluid ··············································7-40
B
Battery············································································7-45
Battery recharging ·······················································7-46
For best battery service ···············································7-45
Reset items ··································································7-47
Before driving ··································································5-3
Before entering vehicle ·················································5-3
Before starting ······························································5-3
Necessary inspections····················································5-3
Index
Brake system··································································5-22
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ································5-25
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)······························5-27
Good braking practices················································5-32
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC)···································5-30
Parking brake·······························································5-24
Power brakes································································5-22
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) ························5-30
BRAKE/CLUTCH fluid ···············································7-39
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level··························7-39
Bulb wattage ····································································8-3
D
Defroster ········································································4-83
Rear window defroster ················································4-83
Dimensions ······································································8-2
Door locks······································································4-16
Auto door Lock/Unlock feature ··································4-18
Child-protector rear door lock·····································4-19
Impact sensing door unlock system ····························4-18
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ·············4-17
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ··········4-16
C
E
Child restraint system ····················································3-25
Using a child restraint system ·····································3-26
Climate control air filter ················································7-42
Filter inspection ···························································7-42
Cruise Control system ···················································5-34
To cancel cruise control:··············································5-37
To decrease the cruising speed:···································5-36
To increase cruise control set speed:···························5-35
To resume cruising speed at more than approximately
40 km/h (25 mph):·····················································5-37
To set cruise control speed: ·········································5-34
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:··5-36
To turn cruise control off:············································5-38
Economical operation ····················································5-44
Emergency starting ··························································6-5
Jump starting ·································································6-5
Push-starting ································································6-7
Emission control system················································7-92
1. Crankcase emission control system ························7-92
2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system············7-92
3. Exhaust emission control system ····························7-93
Engine ··············································································8-2
Engine compartment ················································2-6, 7-2
Engine coolant ·······························································7-36
Changing the coolant···················································7-38
Checking the coolant level ·········································7-36
I 3
Index
Engine number·······························································8-10
Engine oil·······································································7-34
Changing the engine oil and filter·······························7-35
Checking the engine oil level ····································7-34
ENGINE START/STOP button ·······································5-7
ENGINE START/STOP button position ·······················5-7
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button··················5-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ···············7-31
Exterior overview I ··························································2-2
Exterior overview II·························································2-3
F
Fuel filler lid ··································································4-30
Closing the fuel filler lid ·············································4-30
Fuel requirements ··························································1-3
Fuel requirements
Opening the fuel filler lid ············································4-30
Fuses ··············································································7-61
Engine compartment fuse panel ··································7-67
Fuse/relay panel description········································7-65
Instrument panel fuse panel·········································7-66
Memory fuse································································7-63
I 4
H
Hazard warning flasher··················································4-72
Hood···············································································4-28
Closing the hood··························································4-29
Opening the hood ·······················································4-28
How to use this manual ···················································1-2
I
If the engine overheats·····················································6-8
If the engine will not start ···············································6-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start ···········6-4
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly······6-4
If you have a flat tire ·····················································6-14
Changing tires ·····························································6-15
Jack and tools ······························································6-14
Removing and storing the spare tire ·························6-15
If you have a flat tire (Tire Mobility Kit)······················6-22
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit··························6-24
Distributing the sealant················································6-26
Introduction ·································································6-22
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit ···········6-23
Using the Tire Mobility Kit·········································6-25
In case of an emergency while driving····························6-3
If engine stalls while driving·········································6-3
Index
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ···············6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving·······························6-3
Instrument cluster ··························································4-43
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator ···············4-51
Car option (only for Type B cluster) ···························4-52
Gauges ·········································································4-44
Illumination intensity ··················································4-51
Instrument panel illumination ·····································4-44
Maintenance system (only for Type B cluster) ···········4-53
Manual transaxle shift indicator··································4-50
User Settings (only for Type B cluster)·······················4-51
Warnings and indicators ··············································4-55
Instrument panel overview···············································2-5
Interior features····························································4-114
Ashtray ······································································4-114
Cigarette lighter ·························································4-114
Clothes hanger ···························································4-119
Cup holder ·································································4-115
Digital clock and calendar·········································4-118
Floor mat anchor(s) ···················································4-119
Navigation system ·····················································4-120
Power outlet·······························································4-117
Shopping bag holder··················································4-117
Sliding armrest ··························································4-116
Sunvisor ·····································································4-116
Interior light ···································································4-81
Glove box lamp ···························································4-82
Luggage room lamp·····················································4-82
Map lamp ····································································4-81
Room lamp ··································································4-81
Vanity mirror lamp ······················································4-82
Interior overview······························································2-4
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system ·····································5-39
Auto start ·····································································5-40
Auto stop ·····································································5-39
Condition of ISG system operation·····························5-41
ISG system deactivation ··············································5-42
ISG system malfunction ··············································5-42
K
Key positions ···································································5-5
Ignition switch position ·················································5-5
Illuminated ignition switch············································5-5
Keys ·················································································4-3
Key operations·······························································4-3
Record your key number ···············································4-3
L
Light bulbs ·····································································7-73
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, side
marker light and front fog light bulb replacement····7-74
High mounted stop light replacement ·························7-83
I 5
Index
Interior light bulb replacement ····································7-85
Interior light bulb replacement ····································7-85
License plate light bulb replacement ··························7-84
Rear combination light bulb replacement ···················7-79
Side repeater light bulb replacement ··························7-78
Lights ·············································································4-73
Battery saver function··················································4-73
Daytime running light ·················································4-73
Front fog light······························································4-76
High beam operation ··················································4-75
Lighting control ···························································4-73
Turn signals and lane change signals ··························4-76
Mirrors ···········································································4-40
Inside rearview mirror ·················································4-40
Outside rearview mirror ··············································4-40
M
R
Maintenance services·······················································7-3
Owner maintenance precautions ···································7-4
Owner’s responsibility ·················································7-3
Manual climate control system······································4-84
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant ·················································4-93
Climate control air filter ··············································4-92
Heating and air conditioning ·······································4-85
System operation ·························································4-90
Manual Transaxle···························································5-13
Good driving practices ················································5-15
Manual transaxle operation ·········································5-13
Rear-Camera Display·····················································4-71
Recommended lubricants and capacities·························8-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number··························8-7
Remote keyless entry·······················································4-8
Battery replacement·····················································4-10
Immobilizer system ·····················································4-11
Limp home (override) procedure ································4-12
Remote keyless entry system operations·······················4-8
Transmitter precautions ·················································4-9
Road warning···································································6-2
Hazard warning flasher ·················································6-2
I 6
O
Owner maintenance ·························································7-5
Owner maintenance schedule········································7-5
P
Parking brake ·································································7-41
Checking the parking brake·········································7-41
Index
S
Scheduled maintenance service ·······································7-7
Seat···················································································3-2
Driver’s seat···································································3-2
Front passenger’s seat····················································3-2
Front seat adjustment·····················································3-4
Rear seat ········································································3-2
Rear seat adjustment····················································3-10
Seat belts········································································3-14
Care of seat belts ·························································3-23
Pre-tensioner seat belt ·················································3-20
Seat belt precautions····················································3-22
Seat belt restraint system·············································3-14
Smart key ·········································································4-5
Smart key functions·······················································4-5
Smart key precautions ···················································4-7
Special driving conditions ·············································5-46
Driving at night ···························································5-47
Driving in flooded areas ··············································5-48
Driving in the rain ·······················································5-48
Driving off-road···························································5-49
Hazardous driving conditions······································5-46
Highway driving ··························································5-49
Rocking the vehicle ·····················································5-46
Smooth cornering ························································5-47
Starting the engine ·························································5-10
Starting the engine with a smart key···························5-11
Starting the engine with an ignition key ·····················5-10
Steering wheel ·······························································4-37
Electric power steering ················································4-37
Heated steering wheel ·················································4-38
Horn ·············································································4-39
Tilt and telescoping steering········································4-38
Storage compartment ···················································4-110
Center console storage···············································4-110
Cool box ····································································4-111
Glove box ··································································4-110
Increase cargo space ··················································4-113
Luggage net holder····················································4-111
Luggage tray (5 Door)···············································4-112
Sunroof···········································································4-33
Resetting the sunroof···················································4-36
Sliding the sunroof ·····················································4-34
Sunshade······································································4-36
Tilting the sunroof ·······················································4-35
T
Tailgate···········································································4-22
Closing the tailgate······················································4-23
Emergency tailgate safety release ·······························4-23
Opening the tailgate·····················································4-22
I 7
Index
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM···········································4-13
Armed stage·································································4-13
Disarmed stage ····························································4-14
Theft-alarm stage·························································4-14
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)······················6-9
Changing a tire with TPMS·········································6-12
Low tire pressure telltale ·············································6-10
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator ················································6-11
Tire specification and pressure label ·····························8-10
Tires and Wheels ···························································7-48
All season tires ···························································7-58
Checking tire inflation pressure ··································7-49
Low aspect ratio tire ····················································7-59
Radial-ply tires ····························································7-59
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ················7-48
Snow tires ····································································7-59
Summer tires································································7-58
Tire care·······································································7-48
Tire maintenance ·························································7-52
Tire replacement ··························································7-51
Tire rotation ·································································7-50
Tire sidewall labeling ··················································7-53
Tire traction ·································································7-52
Wheel alignment and tire balance ·······························7-51
Wheel replacement ······················································7-52
Tires and wheels ······························································8-5
I 8
Towing ···········································································6-28
Emergency towing ·······················································6-30
Removable towing hook (Front) ·································6-29
Towing service·····························································6-28
Trunk (4 Door)·······························································4-20
Closing the trunk ·························································4-21
Emergency trunk safety release···································4-21
Opening the trunk························································4-20
V
Vehicle break-in process ··················································1-5
Vehicle certification label ················································8-9
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders·············1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN)·······························8-9
Vehicle load limit···························································5-53
Certification label ························································5-56
Tire and loading information label······························5-53
Vehicle weight ·······························································5-58
W
Washer fluid···································································7-40
Checking the washer fluid level ··································7-40
Weight/Volume ································································8-6
Windows ········································································4-24
Manual windows ·························································4-27
Power windows····························································4-25
Index
Windshield defrosting and defogging··························4-105
Automatic climate control system·····························4-106
Defogging logic ·························································4-107
Manual climate control system ·································4-105
Winter driving ································································5-50
Carry emergency equipment········································5-52
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary·················5-51
Check battery and cables·············································5-51
Check spark plugs and ignition system·······················5-51
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath ···········5-52
Don't let your parking brake freeze·····························5-52
Snowy or Icy conditions··············································5-50
To keep locks from freezing········································5-51
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system ···5-51
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant ····················5-51
Wiper blades ··································································7-42
Blade inspection ··························································7-42
Blade replacement ·······················································7-43
Wipers and washers ·······················································4-77
Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 Door)········4-80
Windshield washers ·····················································4-79
Windshield wipers ·······················································4-78
I 9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement